Mathura Mahatmya

Rupa goswami

Text 1

harir api bhajamänebhyaù 
     präyo muktim- dadäti na tu bhaktim 
vihita-tad-unnati-satram- 
     mäthure dhanyam- nämämi tväm

     harir-Hari; api-even; bhajamänebhyaù -worshiping; präyaù-for the most part; muktim-liberation; dadäti-gives; na-not; tu-but;û bhaktim-bhakti; vihita-placed; tad-unnati-satram-great sacrifice; mäthure-in Mathurä; dhanyam-auspicious; nämämi-obeisaëes; tväm-to you.

     Generally Lord Hari gives mukti, but not bhakti, to his worshipers. O Mathurä, to you, who gives a great sacrifice of pure bhakti and who are very auspicious, I offer my respectful obeisances. 

Text 2

dhanyänäà hådayänanda-
     pradaà saìgåhyate mudä
mähätmyaà mathurä-puryäù
     sarva-tértha-çiromaëeù

     dhanyänäm-of the fortunate; hådayänanda-bliss to the hearts; pradam-giving; saìgåhyate-collected; mudä-happily; mähätmyam-glorificaion;mathurä-puryäù-of Mathurä; sarva-tértha-çiromaëeù-the crest jewel of all holy places.

     This glorification of Mathurä-puré, which is the crest jewel of all holy places, has been very happily collected. It gives joy to the hearts of the fortunate.

Text 3

taträsyäù päpa-häritvam. ädi-värähe 

viàçatiù yojanänäà tu
     mathuräà mama maëòalam
yatra tatra naro snäto
     mucyate sarva-pätakaiù

     tatra-there; äsyäù-of that; päpa-häritvam-removal of sin; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viàçatiù'twenty; yojanänäm-yojanas; tu-indeed; mathuräàMathurä; mama-My; maëòalam-circle; yatra-where; tatra-there; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; mucyate-is liberated; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins.

Mathura' Removes Sins

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     My abode of Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas in circumferance. A person who stays there becomes free from all sins.

Text 4

pade pade tértha-phalaà
     mathuräyä vasundhare
yatra tatra naro snäto
     mucyate ghora-kilbiñaiù

     pade pade-at every step; tértha-phalam-result of visiting holy places; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; vasundhare-O earth-goddess; yatra-where; tatra-there; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; mucyate-liberated; ghora-kilbiñaiù-from the most terrible sins.

     With every step he takes in Mathura' he gets the result of going to all other holy places. O earth-goddess, any person who bathes in Mathurä becomes free from the most terrible sins.

Text 5

sarva-dharma-vihinänäà
     puruñänäà durätmanäm
narakärti-harä devi
     mathurä päpa-ghätiné     

     sarva-dharma-vihinänäm-devoid of religion; puruñänäm- of persons; durätmanäm-wicked; narakärti-harä-removing the sufferings of hell; devi-O goddess; mathurä-Mathurä; päpa-ghätiné-destroying sins.     

     O goddess, Mathura' rescues the irreligious from the sufferings of hell and removes their sins. 

Text 6

kåtaghnaç ca suräpaç ca
     cauro bhagna-vratas tathä
mathuräà präpya manujä
     mucyate sarva-kilbiñaiù

     kåtaghnaù-ungrateful; ca-and; suräpaù-drunkards; ca-and; cauraù-thief; bhagna-vrataù-broken vows; tathä-then; mathuräm-Mathurä; präpya-attaining; manujäù-persons; mucyate-liberated; sarva-kilbiñaiù-from all sins.

     Ungrateful persons, drunkards, thieves, and they who have broken vows, become free from all sins when they enter Mathura' 

Text 7-8

süryodare tamo naçyed
     yathä vajra-bhayän nagäù
tarkñaà dåñövä yathä sarpä
     meghä vata-hatä iva

tattva-jïänad yathä duhkhaà
     siàhaà dåñövä yathä mågaù
tathä päpäni naçyanti 
     mathurä-darçanät kñaëät

     süryodare-in the sunrise; tamaù-darkness; naçyed-destroyed; yathä-as; vajra-bhayän-from fear of the goad; nagäù-elephants; tarkñam-Garuòa; dåñövä-seeing; yathä-as; sarpäù-snakes;; meghäh-clouds; vata-hatä-broken by the wind; iva-like; tattva-jïänad-because of knowledge of the truth; yathä-as; duhkham-suffering; siàham-a lion; dåñövä-having seen; yathä-as; mågaù-deer; tathä-in that way; päpäni-sins; naçyanti-perish;  mathurä-darçanät-from the sight of Mathurä; kñaëät-in a moment.

     As darknress is destroyed by the rising of the sun, as elephants fear the goad, as snakes that have seen Garuòa, as clouds broken by the wind, as unhappiness destroyed by knowledge, and as deer that have seen a lion, so are sins destroyed by the sight of Mathurä.

Text 9

çraddhayä bhakti-yuktaç ca
     gatvä madhupuréà naraù
brahmahäpi viçuddhyeta
     kià punaù tö anya-pätaké     

     çraddhayä-with faith; bhakti-yuktaù-and devotion; ca-and; gatvä-going; madhupurém-to Mathurä; naraù-a person; brahmahä-killer of a brähmaëa; api-even; viçuddhyeta-is purified; kim- punaù-what to speak; tu-indeed; anya-pätaké-of other sins.     

     A person who with faith and devotion goes to Mathurä becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa, what to speak of other sins.

Text 10

mathurä-snäna-kämasyä     gacchatas tu pade pade
niräçäni vrajanty asya
     päpäny eva çarérataù

     mathurä-snäna-kämasya-of a person who desires to bathe in Mathurä; gacchataù-going; tu-indeed; pade pade-at every step; niräçäni-giving up hope; vrajanti-go; asya-of him; päpäni-sins; eva-indeed; çarérataù-from the body.

     For one who, desiring to bathe in Mathurä, goes there, at every step sins, giving up all hope, leave his body.

Text 11

anusaìgena gacchan hi
     vänijyenäpi sevayä
mathurä-snäna-mätreëa
     päpaà tyaktvä divaà vrajet

     anusaìgena-contact; gacchan-going; hi-indeed; vänijyena-on business; api-even; sevayä-with service; mathurä-in Mathurä; snäna-mätreëa-only by bathing; päpam-sins; tyaktvä-abandoning; divam-to the spiritual world; vrajet-goes.

     One who, going to Mathurä only on business, takes a bathe there becomes free from all sins and goes to the spiritual world.

Text 12

nämäni gåhëatäm asyäù
     sadaiva tö amhasaù kñayaù
sadä kåta-yugaà cätra
     sadä caivottaräyaëam

     nämäni-names; gåhëatäm-taking; asyäù-of it; sadä-always; eva-indeed; tu-certainly; amhasaù'sins; kñayaù-destroyed; sadä-always; kåta-yugam-Satya-yuga; ca-and; atra-here; sadä-always; ca-and; eva-indeed; uttaräyaëam-Uttaräyaëa.

     For one who always chants the name of Mathurä sins are always destroyed. For him it is always Satya-yuga. For him it is always the auspicious time of Uttaräyaëa.

Text 13

yaù çåëoti varärohe
     mäthuraà mama maëòalam
anyenoccaritaà çaçvat
     so 'pi päpaiù pramucyate
     yaù-who; çåëoti-hears; varärohe-O beautiful girl; mäthuram-Mathurä; mama-My; maëòalam-circle; anyena-by another; uccaritam-spoken; çaçvat-always; saù api-he; päpaiù-from sins; pramucyate-free.

     O beautiful one, he who hears from others about my Mathurä-maëòala is always free from sin.

Text 14

tri-rätram api ye tatra
     vasanti manujä mune
teñäà punanti niyataà
     spåñöaç caraëa-reëavaù

     tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-people; mune'O sage; teñäm-of them; punanti-purify; niyatam-always; spåñöaù-touched; caraëa-of the feet; reëavaù-dust.

     O sage, to touch of the dust of the feet of they who live for three nights there purifies one.

Text 15

pädme pätäla-khaëòe hara-gauré-samväde 

kåñëa-kréòä-karaà sthänaà
     mathuräyäs tataà bhuvi
puëyä madhupuré yatra
     sarva-päpa-pranäçiné

     pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; hara-gauré-samväde-in the conversation between Çiva and Gauré; kåñëa-kréòä-karam- Kåñëa's pastimes;sthänam-place; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; tatam-manifest; bhuvi-on earth; puëyä-sacred; madhupuré-Mathurä; yatra-where; sarva-päpa-all sins;pranäçiné-destroying.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, in a conversation between Lord Çiva and Gauré, it is said:

     On this earth the shore of the Yamunä is the place where Lord Kåñëa enjoys pastiumes. On that shore is sacred Mathura' puré, which destroys all sins.

Text 16

yathä tåëa-samühaà tu
     jvälayanti sphuliìgikäùtathä mahänti päpäni
     dahate mathurä-puré

     yathä-as; tåëa-samüham-grass; tu-indeed; jvälayanti-burns; sphuliìgikäù-sparks; tathä-so; mahänti'great; päpäni-sins; dahate-burns; mathurä-puré-Mathurä.

     As sparks set grass on fire, so does Mathurä-puré burn the greatest sins.

Text 17

skände käçé-khaëòe

hådyaà madhuvanaà präyo
     yamunäyäs taöe mahat
ädyaà bhagavataù sthänaà
     yat puëyaà hari-medhasaù
päpo 'pi jantus tat präpya
     niñpäpo jäyate dhruvam

     skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; käçé-khaëòe-Kasi-khaëòa; hådyam-charming; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; präyaù-for the most part; yamunäyäù-of the Yamunä; taöe'on the shore; mahat-great; ädyam-transcendental; bhagavataù-of the Lord; sthänam-place; yat-which; puëyam-sacred; hari-medhasaù-fixed their hearts on Lord Hari» päpaù-sin; api-even; jantuù-person; tat-that; präpya-attaining; niñpäpaù-sinless; jäyate-born; dhruvam-indeed.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Käçé-khaëòa, it is said:

     The charming forest of Madhuvana is situated on the shore of the Yamunä. Madhuvana is the original place of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is very sacred to they whose hearts are fixed on Lord Hari. A sinful man who goes there becomes at once free from all sins.

Text 18

atha puëya-pradatvaà yathä ädi-värähe 

yat puëyam açvamedhena
     yat puëyaà räjasüyataù
mathuräyäà tad äpnoti
     tri-rätra-çayanäd yamé

     atha-now; puëya-pradatvam-granting pious merit; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yat-which; puëyam-piety; açvamedhena-by an asvamedha-yajna; yat-which; puëyam-piety; räjasüyataù-from a rajasuya-yajna; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tad-that; äpnoti-attains; tri-rätra-for three nights; çayanäd-by resting; yamé-self-controlled.

Mathura' Grants Pious Merit

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     The pious merit attained by performing an açvamedha-yajïa and the pious merit attained by performing a räjasüya-yajïa is at once attained by a self-controlled person who stays for three nights in Mathurä.

Text 19

viàçatir yojanänäà tu
     mäthuraà mama maëòalam
pade pade 'çvamedhéyaà
     puëyaà nätra vicaraëä

     viàçatir yojanänäm-20 yojanas; tu-indeed; mäthuram- mama maëòalam-My circle of Mathurä; pade pade-at every step; açvamedhéyam-of an asvamedha-yajna; puëyam-piety; na-not; atra-here; vicaraëä-doubt.

     My Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas (160 miles, in size. With every step there one attains the piety of perfoming an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt. 

Text 20

snänena sarva-térthänäà
     yat syät sukåta-saïcayaù
tato 'dhikataraà proktaà
     mäthure sarva-maëòale

     snänena-by bathing; sarva-térthänäm-of all holy places; yat-what; syät-is; sukåta-saïcayaù'piety; tataù-than that; adhikataram-greater; proktam-said; mäthure sarva-maëòale-in the circle of Mathurä.

     In Mathurä-maëòala one attains piety greater than what is attained by bathing in all other holy places.

Text 21

caturëäm api vedänäà
     puëyam adhyayanäc ca yat
tat puëyaà jäyate puàsäà
     mathuräà vadatäà satäm

     caturëäm api vedänäm-of the four Vedas; puëyam-piety; adhyayanät-from study; ca-and; yat'what; tat-that; puëyam-piety; jäyate-is born; puàsäm-of persons; mathuräm-Mathurä; vadatäm-saying; satäm-saints.

     The same piety that is attained by studying the four Vedas is also attained by a saintly devotee who speak the word Mathurä.

Text 22

svodbhava-päpa-häritvam. yathä ädi-värähe 

anyatra hi kåtaà päpaà
     tértham äsädya naçyati
térthe tu yat kåtaà päpaà
     vajra-lepo bhaved dhruvam     

     svodbhava-manifest in itself; päpa-sins; häritvam-removal; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anyatra-in any other place; hi-certainly; kåtam-performed; päpam-sin; tértham-holy place; äsädya-attaining; naçyati-perishes; térthe-in the holy place; tu-but; yat-what; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; vajra-of a thunderbolt; lepaù-the licking; bhaved-becomes; dhruvam-certainly.     

Mathura' Removes the Sins Performed There

     This is described in the Ädi-varäha Purana:

     Sins performed in some other place become destroyed when they approach a holy place of pilgrimage. However, sins performed at a holy place of pilgrimage become like the licking of lightning bolt.

Text 23

mathuräyäà kåtaà päpaà
     mathuräyäà vinaçyati 
jïänato 'jïänato 'väpi
     yat päpaà samupärjitam- 
sukåtaà duñkåtaà väpi
     mathuräyäà praëaçyati

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; kåtam-done; päpam-sins; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vinaçyati-perishs; jïänataù-of the wise; ajïänataù-of the ignorant; vä-or; api-and; yat-which; päpam-sins; samupärjitam-attained; sukåtam-pious; duñkåtam-impious; vä-or; api-and; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; praëaçyati-perishes.

     Sins performed at Mathurä become destroyed at Mathurä. Whether one is wise, or ignorant, saintly or wicked, his sins become destroyed at Mathurä.

Text 24

yatra kåñëena saïcérëaà
     kréòitaà ca yathä-sukham
cakräìkita-padä tena
     sthäne brahmamaye çubhe

     yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; saïcérëam-filled; kréòitam-enjoyed pastimes; ca-and; yathä-sukham-according to happiness; cakra-with the cakra; aìkita-marked; padä-feet; tena-by Him; sthäne-place; brahmamaye-spiritual; çubhe-auspicious.

     In this beautiful spiritual place Lord Kåñëa, whose feet are marked with a cakra, enjoyed transcendental pastimes to his heart's content.

Text 25

eñä divyä puré devi
     nitya-kälaà su-gopitä
bhaktä tvaà mama siñyä ca
     kathitä te vasundhare

     eñä-this; divyä-transcendental; puré-city; devi-O goddess; nitya-kälam-eternally; su-gopitä-hidden; bhaktä-devotee; tvam-you; mama-My» siñyä-disciple; ca-and; kathitä-spoken; te-to you; vasundhare-O earth-goddess.

     O goddess, this transcendental city is eternally hidden with great care. O earth-goddess, because you are My devotee and My disciple, it is now described to you.

Text 26

na mayä kathitaà devi
     brahmaëaç ca mahätmanaù
rudrasya na mayä pürvaà
     kathitaà ca vasundhare
mayä su-gopitaà hy etad
     guhyäd guhyatamaà småtam

     na-not; mayä-by Me; kathitam-described; devi-O goddess; brahmaëaù-Brahmä; ca-and; mahätmanaù'great soul; rudrasya-Çiva; na-not; mayä-by Me; pürvam-previously; kathitam-said; ca-and; vasundhare-O earth; mayä-by Me; su-gopitam-hidden; hi-indeed; etad-this; guhyäd guhyatamam- småtam-greatest secret.

     O goddess, I have not described this to the brähmaëas and the great souls. I have not described it to Lord Çiva. O earth-goddess, it has been carefully hidden by Me because I consider it the most confidential of all secrets.

Text 27

anyatra daçabhir varñaiù
     prärabdhaà bhujyate tu yat
kilbiñaà tan mahä-devi
     mäthure daçabhir dinaiù  

     anyatra-in another place; daçabhir varñaiù-for 10 years; prärabdham-beginnings; bhujyate-experienced; tu-indeed; yat-what; kilbiñam-sin; tat-that; mahä-devi-O goddess; mäthure-in Mathurä; daçabhir dinaiù-in 10 days.  

     O goddess, sins that fester for 10 years in other places are destroyed in Mathurä in 10 days.

Text 28

atha sarva-térthädhikatvam. yatha ädi-värähe 

na vidyate hi pätäle
     näntarékñe na mänuñe
samaà tu mathuräyä hi
     térthe mama vasundhare

     atha-now; sarva-of all; tértha-holy places; adhikatvam-superiority; yatha-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; na-not; vidyate-is; hi-indeed; pätäle-in hell; na-not; antarékñe-in heaven; na-not; mänuñe-in the world of men; samam-equal; tu-certainly; mathuräyä-to Mathurä; hi-certainly; térthe-holy place; mama-My; vasundhare-O earth.

Mathurä Is the Best of All Sacred Places

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O earth-goddess, neither in hell, heaven,, nor in the world of humans, is there any sacred place equal to Mathurä.

Text 29

tatra dharaëé-praçnaù 

naimiñaà puñkaraà caiva
     puréà väräëaséà tathäetän hitvä mahä-bhäga
     mathuräà kià praçaàsasi

     tatra-there; dharaëé-of the earth; praçnaù-question; naimiñam-Naimiñäraëya; puñkaram-Puñkara; ca-and; eva-indeed; purém-city» väräëasém-Väräëasé; tathä-that; etän-these; hitvä-ignoring; mahä-bhäga-O auspicious Lord; mathuräm-Mathurä; kim-why?; praçaàsasi-You glorify.

The the Earth-goddess Asked:

     There are Naimiñäraëya, Lake Puñkara, and the city of Väräëasé. O auspicious Lord, why do You ignore them and glorify Mathurä? 

Text 30

çré-varähenoktam mathureti su-vikhyätam
     asti kñetraà paraà mama
su-ramyä ca praçastä ca
     janma-bhümiù priyä mama

     çré-varähena-by Lord varäha; uktam-said; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätam-famous; asti'is; kñetram-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; su-ramyä-charming; ca-and; praçastä-glorious; ca-and; janma-bhümiù-birthplace; priyä-dear; mama-to me.

     Lord Varäha said: 

     Mathura' is famous as my supreme abode. It is beautiful and glorious. It is the place where I took birth. It is very dear to Me.

Text 31

sarveñäà devi térthänäà
     mathuräà paramäà mahät
kåñëena kréòitaà yatra
     tä ca çuddhaà pade pade

     sarveñäm-of all; devi-o goddess; térthänäm-holy place; mathuräm-Mathurä; paramäm-best; mahat-great; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; kréòitam-played; yatra-where; tac-which; ca-and;û çuddham-pure; pade pade-at every step.

     O goddess, Mathura' is the greatest of all holy places. Kåñëa enjoys pastimes there. It purifies one at every step.

Text 32

cakräìkitaà hi tat sarvaà     kåñëasyaiva padena tu
bäla-kréòana-rüpäëi
     kåtäni saha gopakaiù

     cakräìkitam-marked with the cakra; hi-indeed; tat-that; sarvam-all; kåñëasya-of Kåñëa; eva-indeed; padena-by the foot; tu-indeed; bäla-kréòana-rüpäëi-in childhood pastimes; kåtäni-done; saha'with; gopakaiù-the gopas.

     It is completely covered with Kåñëa footprints. Kåñëa enjoys childhood pastimes there with the cowherd boys.

Text 33

yäni térthäni täny eva
     sthapitäni majarñibhiù
etat te kathitaà säraà
     mayä satyena suvrate

     yäni-which; térthäni-holy place; täni-they; eva-indeed; sthapitäni-established; majarñibhiù-by great sages; etat-this; te-to you; kathitam-spoken; säram-essence; mayä-by Me; satyena'in truth; suvrate-O saintly girl.

     The great sages have discovered the holy places places of Mathurä. O saintly one, I have thus truthfully described the essence of Mathura' to you.

Text 34

na térthaà mathuräyä hi
     na devaù keçavät paraù

     na-not; tértham-holy place; mathuräyäh-than Mathurä; hi-indeed; na-not; devaù-demigod; keçavät-than Kåñëa; paraù-greater.

     No holy place is better than Mathurä, and no demigod is better than Lord Keçava.

Text 35 

värähe 

çåëu tattvena me bhümi
     kathyamänam atho 'naghe
mathureti su-vikhyätä
     yasmin kñetre priyä mama

     värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; çåëu-listen; tattvena-in truth; me-My; bhümi-O earth; kathyamänam-saying; athaù-then; anaghe-O sinless one; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätä-very famous; yasmin-in which; kñetre-place; priyä-beloved; mama-My.

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:
 
     O earth-goddess, please listen and I shall tell you the truth. O sinless one, Mathura' is very famous as the place where my beloved Rädha' stays.

Text 36

su-ramyä su-praçastä ca
     janma-bhümir mama priye
bhaviñyati varärohe
     dväpare saàsthite yuge

     su-ramyä-beautiful; su-praçastä-glorious; ca-and; janma-bhümir-birthplace; mama-My; priye-O beloved; bhaviñyati-will be; varärohe-O beautiful girl; dväpare saàsthite yuge-in Dväpara-yuga.

     O dear one, O beautiful one, delightful and famous Mathura' is the place where I will take birth in the Dväpara-yuga.

Text 37

yayäti-nåpa-vaàçe 'ham
     utpatsyämi vasundhare
çatäni païca varñänäm
     atra sthasyämi niçcayaù

     yayäti-nåpa-vaàçe-in the dynasty of King Yayati; aham-I; utpatsyämi-will take birth; vasundhare-O earth» çatäni-hundreds; païca-five; varñänäm-years; atra-here; sthasyämi'I will stay; niçcayaù-certainly.

     O earth-goddess, I will take birth in the dynasty of King Yayäti and I will stay here for 500 years.

Text 38 

skände mathura-khaëòe närada-väkyam 

çåëu dharmaà mahä-präjïa
     yat tvaà påcchasi dharma-vit
gopyaà sapta-puréëäà tu
     mäthura-maëòalaà småtaà

     skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; närada-väkyam-Närada's statement; çåëu-please listen; dharmam-religion; mahä-präjïa-O intelligent one; yat-what; tvam-you; påcchasi-ask; dharma-vit-O knower of religion; gopyam-hidden; sapta-puréëäm-of the seven cities; tu-indeed; mäthura-maëòalam-Mathurä; småtam-is considered.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, Närada said:

     O wise one, O knower of religion, please listen to the answer to the question you have asked. Mathura'-maëòala is known to be the most confidential of the seven holy cities.

Text 39

triàçad-varña-sahasräëi
     triàçad-varña-çatäni ca
yat phalam bhärate varñe
     tat phalaà mathuräà smaran

     triàçad-varña-sahasräëi-thirty thousand years; triàçad-varña-çatäni-three thousand years; ca-and; yat phalam-the result; bhärate varñe-on earth; tat phalam-that result; mathuräm-Mathurä; smaran-remembering.

     The pious result attained by three thousand years or thirty thousand years of endeavor on earth is attained by simply once remembering Mathurä.

Text 40 

tathä hi ädi-värähe 

mahä-mäghyaà prayäge ca
     yat phalaà labhate naraù
tat phalaà labhate devi
     mathuräyäà dine dine

     tathä hi-furthermore; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mahä-mäghyam-on maha'-mägha; prayäge-at Prayäga; ca-and; yat phalam-the result; labhate-attains; naraù-a person; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; dine dine-any day.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     The pious result one attains on the Maha'-mägha sacred day at Prayäga is attained on any day in Mathurä.

Text 41

kärttikyäà caiva yat puëyaà
     puñkare tu vasundhare
tat phalaà labhate martyo     mathuräyäà dine dine

     kärttikyäm-during Kärttika; ca-and; eva-certainly; yat puëyam-the piety; puñkare-at Puñkara; tu-indeed; vasundhare-O earth; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; martyaù-a human; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» dine dine-any day.

     O earth-goddess, the pious result one attains during the month of Kärttika at Puñkara Lake is attained on any day in Mathurä.

Text 42

väräëasyäà tu yat puëyaà
     rähu-graste diväkare
tat phalaà labhate devi
     mathuräyäà jitendriyaù

     väräëasyäm-at varanasi; tu-indeed; yat puëyam-the piety; rähu-graste diväkare-during a solar eclipse; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» jitendriyaù-a person who controls his senses.

     O goddess, the pious reult one attains on a solar eclipse in Väräëasé is attained in Mathura' by a person who controls his senses.

Text 43

pürëe varñe sahasre tu
     väräëasyäà tu yat phalam
tat phalaà labhate devi
     mathuräyäà kñaëena hi

     pürëe varñe sahasre-after a thousand years; tu-indeed; väräëasyäm-at Väräëasé; tu-indeed; yat phalam'that result; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» kñaëena-in a moment; hi-indeed.

     O goddess, the pious result one attains at Väräëasé after a thousand years in attained at Mathura' in a single moment.

Text 44

pädme pätäla-khaëòe 

pürëe varña-sahasre tu
     tértha-räjeñu yat phalam
tat phalaà labhate devi
     mathuräyäà dine dine

     pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khand; pürëe varña-sahasre-after a thousand years; tu-indeed; tértha-räjeñu'at the kings of holy places; yat phalam tat phalam-the same result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; dine dine-any day.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     O goddess, the same pious result one attains at Prayäga, the king of holy places, by staying there for a thousand years is attained every day at Mathurä.

Text 45

godävaré-dvädaçako naro yaù
     kñetre kurüëäà kñiti-däyako yaù
ñaë-mäsakän sädhayate gayäyäà
     samaà bhaven no dinam ekaà mäthure

     godävaré-by the Godävaré; dvädaçakaù-twelve; naro yaù-a person who; kñetre kurüëäm-at Kurukñetra; kñiti-däyakaù-giving land; yaù-who; ñan„-mäsakän-for siø months; sädhayate-staying; gayäyäm-at gayä; samam-equal; bhavet-not; naù-not» dinam-day; ekam-one; mäthure-in Mathurä.

     A person who lives for twelve months on the shore of the Godävaré, who gives a gift of land at Kurukñetra, or who lives for siø months at Gayä, is not equal to a person who lives for a single day at Mathurä.

Text 46

na dvärakä käçé käïcé na mäyä
     gadäbhåto yasya samaà na tértham
santarpitä yad yamunä-jalena
     väïchanti no pitaraù piëòa-dänam

     na-not; dvärakä-Dvaraka; käçé-Väräëasé; käïcé-Kanci; na-not; mäyä-Maya; gadäbhåtaù-of Lord Kåñëa; yasya-of whom; samam-equal; na-not; tértham-holy place; santarpitä-satisfied; yad-which; yamunä-of the yamunä; jalena-with water;û väïchanti-desire; naù-not; pitaraù-the pitäs; piëòa-dänam-piëòa.

     Neither Dvärakä, Käçé, Kaïcé, nor Mäya' are equal to Lord Kåñëa's place of Mathurä. Pleased by the offering of Yamuna' water there, the pitäs do not desire offerings of piëòa.

Text 47 

ata evottara-khaëòe 

mathuräyäà prakurvanté     puré-sädhäraëé-dåçäm
ye naräs te 'pi vijïeyäù
     päpa-räçibhir anvitäù

     ataù eva-therefore; uttara-khaëòe-in the Uttara-khaëòa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; prakurvanti-do; puré-sädhäraëé-an ordinary city;dåçäm-seeing; ye-which; naräù-people; te api-they; vijïeyäù-known; päpa-räçibhir-with sins; anvitäù-filled.

     In the Uttara-khaëòa it is said:

     They who think that Mathurä is an ordinary city are known to be filled with great sins.

Text 48

çré-kåñëäkhyaà paraà brahma
     yatra kréòati sarvadä
tad-anyäkhila-térthebhyo
     'dhikaà yat tat kim ucyate

     çré-kåñëäkhyam-named Lord Kåñëa; param- brahma-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yatra-where; kréòati-enjoys pastimes; sarvadä-eternally; tad-anyäkhila-térthebhyaù-than all other holy places; adhikam-greater; yat tat-that; kim ucyate-what more need be said?

     The the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, enjoys pastimes there eternally. For this reason it is better than all other holy places. What more need be said?

Text 49

nirväëa-khaëòe ca 

taà puréà präpya mathuräà
     madéyäà sura-durlabhäm
khaïo bhütvändhako väpi
     präëän eva parityajet

     nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvaana-khaëòa; ca-also; tam- purém-that city; präpya-attaining; mathuräm-Mathura'; madéyäm-My; sura-durlabhäm-difficult for the demigods to attain; khaïaù-a cripple; bhütvä-becoming; andhakaù-a blind man; vä-or; api-even; präëän-life; eva-indeed; parityajet-leaving.

     In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:

     A blind man or a cripple who dies in my city of Mathurä, which even the demigods cannot attain, will attain My eternal abode.

Text 50

pätäla-khaëòe ca 

na dåñöä mathurä yena 
     didåkñä yasya jäyate
yatra tatra måtasyäpi
     mäthure janma jäyate

     pätäla-khaëòe-in the Patala-khaëòa; ca-and; na-not; dåñöä-seen; mathurä-Mathurä; yena-by whom; didåkñä-desiring to see; yasya-of whom; jäyate'is born; yatra-where; tatra-there; måtasya-dead; api-even; mäthure-in Mathurä; janma-birth; jäyate-is born.

     In the Pätäla-khaëòa Puräëa it is also said:

     He who deos not see Mathurä, although he yearns to see it, will take birth after his death in Mathurä.

Text 51

asaìkhya-térthäçrayatvam. yathä ädi-värähe 

ñañöi-koöi-sahasräëi
     ñañti-koöi-çatäni ca
tértha-saìkhyä tu vasudhe
     mathuräyäà mayoditä

     asaìkhya-numberless; tértha-of holy places; äçrayatvam-the condition of being the shelter; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ñañöi-koöi-sahasräëi ñañti-koöi-çatäni ca-60 billion; tértha-saìkhyä-holy place; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mayä-by Me; uditä-manifest.

Mathura' Is the Shelter of Numberless Holy Places 

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O earth-goddess, 60 billion sacred places reside in My Mathurä.  

Text 52

skände mathura-khaëòe 

bhüme rajäàsi gaëanä
     kälenäpi bhaven nåpa
mäthure yäni térthäni
     teñäà saìkhyä na vartate
     skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; bhüme-O earth; rajäàsi-dust; gaëanä-counting; kälena-in time; api-even; bhavet-may be; nåpa-O king; mäthure-in Mathurä; yäni-which; térthäni-holy places; teñäm-of them; saìkhyä-counting;û na-not; vartate-is.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     O king, in the course of time it may be possible to count the grains of dust on the earth, but it will not be possible to count the number of holy places in Mathurä.  

Text 53

atha niväsopadeçaù. pädme pätäla-khaëòe 

kuru bhoù kuru bho väsaà
     mathuräyäù puréà prati
yatra gopyaç ca govindas
     trailokyasya prakäçakaù

     atha-now; niväsa-residence; upadeçaù-instruction; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; kuru-do; bhoù-Oh; kuru-do; bhaù-Oh; väsam-residence; mathuräyäù purém- prati-in Mathurä; yatra-where; gopyaù-the gopis; ca-and; govindaùKåñëa; trailokyasya-of the three worlds; prakäçakaù-creator.

Instruction to Reside in Mathurä  

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-kanda, it is said»  

     Reside in Mathurä! Reside in Mathurä, where the gopés, and Lord Govinda, who created the three worlds, live.

Text 54

re re saàsära-magnädya
     sikñäm ekäà tu me çåëu
yadécchasi sukhaà sändraà
     väsaà kuru madhoù pure

     re-Oh; re-Oh; saàsära-in birth and death;magna-plunged; adya-today; sikñäm-instruction; ekäm-one; tu-indeed; me-from Me; çåëu-please hear; yadi-if; icchasi-you desire; sukham-happiness; sändram-intense; väsam-residence; kuru-do; madhoù pure-in Mathurä.

     O people plunged in the ocean of birth and death, please hear this one teaching: if you desire intense bliss, then please reside in Mathura'.  

Text 55

yadéccheù pära-saàsäraà
     vahitraà mäthuraà kuru
nauko sa prerakaù kåñëo
     bhoù çive pära-kärakaù

     yadi-if; iccheù-you desire; pära-the other shore; saàsäram-birth and death; vahitram-boat; mäthuram-Mathurä; kuru-make; naukaù-a boat; sah-He; prerakaù-captain; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; bhoù-Oh; çive-O Gauré; pära-kärakaù-taking to the other shore.

     O Gauré, if you desire to cross the ocean of repeated birth and death, then reside in Mathurä. Mathura' is a strong boat, and Kåñëa, the captain of this strong boat, will lead you to the other shore. 

Text 56

aho loko mahän andho
     netra-yukto na paçyati
mäthure vidyamäne 'pi
     saàsåtià bhajate sadä

     ahaù-Oh; lokaù-world; mahän-great; andhaù-blind; netra-yuktaù-with eyes; na-do not; paçyati'see; mäthure-in Mathurä; vidyamäne-being; api-even; saàsåtim-to birth and death» bhajate-attached; sadä-always.

     The people of this world, although they have eyes, are blind and cannot see. Although Mathurä is manifest in this world, they remain attached to this world of repeated birth and death.

Text 57

mänuñéà yonim atuläà
     labdhvä bhägyasya yogataù
våthaiväyur gataà teñäà
     na dåñövä mathuräà purém

     mänuñém-human; yonim-birth; atuläm-rare; labdhvä-having attained; bhägyasya yogataù-possessing; våthä-useless; eva-indeed; äyur-life; gatam-gone; teñäm-of them; na-not; dåñövä-having seen; mathuräm- purém-Mathurä.

     If, after attaining this rare and valuable human form of life, one does not see Mathurä, then he wastes his life.

Text 58

aho mateù sudaurbalyam
     aho bhägyasya daurvidham
aho mohasya mahimä
     mathurä naiva sevyate

     ahaù-Oh; mateù-of intelligence; sudaurbalyam-great weakness; ahaù-Oh; bhägyasya-of good-fortune; daurvidham-collapse; ahaù-Oh; mohasya-of illusion; mahimä-glory; mathurä-Mathurä; na-not; eva-indeed; sevyate-is served.

     O what foolishness! What misfortune! What illusion when Mathurä is not served.

Text 59 

säpadaà sampadaà jïätvä
     säpäyaà käyaà uccakaiù
capaläà caïcaläà caiva
     dåñövä mat-puram äçrayet

     sa-with; äpadam-calamity; sampadam-prosperity; jïätvä-knowing; sa-äpäyam-with death; käyam-the body; uccakaiù-very; capaläm-fickle; caïcaläm-the goddess of fortune; ca-and; eva-indeed; dåñövä-having seen; mat-puram'My city; äçrayet-should take shelter.

     Knowing that prosperity contains calamity within it, and knowing that this body contains death within it, and seeing that the goddess of fortune is fickle, one should take shelter of My city of Mathurä.

Texts 60-62

skände mathura-khaëòe

tatraiva bhavatäà bandhuù
     päëòavänäà suhåt sakhä
sätvatänäà priyaù säkñäd
     yädavänäà kuleçvaraù

kåñëaù kamala-paträkñaù
     so 'vatérëo yudhiñöhira
rämeëa saha devakyäà
     vasudeva-gåhottame

tasya karmäny anekäni
     parigétäni süribhiù
jätäni mäthure deçe     täà puréà ko na sevate

     skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhavatäm-of you; bandhuù-friend; päëòavänäm-of the Pandavas; suhåt sakhä-friend; sätvatänäm-of the Satvatas; priyaù-dear; säkñäd-directly; yädavänäm-of the Yadavas; kuleçvaraù-leader of the family; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; kamala-paträkñaù-lotus-eyed; saù-He; avatérëaù-descended; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhisthira; rämeëa-with Balaräma; saha-with; devakyäm-in the womâ of Devaké; vasudeva-gåha-uttame-in Vasudeva's house; tasya-of Him; karmäni-deeds; anekäni-many; parigétäni-glorified; süribhiù-by the devotees; jätäni-born; mäthure deçe-in Mathurä; täm- purém-this city; kaù-who?; na-not; sevate-serves.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     O Yudhiñöhira, who will not serve this city of Mathurä, where lotus-eyed Kåñëa, who appeared with Balaräma in the womâ of Devaké in the palace of Vasudeva, and whose activities are glorified by the demigods, and who is the friend of all you Päëòavas, and who is dear to all the Sätvatas, and who is the king of all the Yadus, decsended?

Text 63 

ata evädi-värähe 

mathuräà ca parityajya
     yo 'nyatra kurute ratim
müòho bhramati saàsäre
     mohito mama mäyayä

     ataù eva-therefore; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; parityajya-abandoning; yaù-who; anyatra-in another place; kurute-does; ratim-attraction; müòhaù-bewildered; bhramati-wanders; saàsäre-in birth and death; mohitaù-bewildered; mama-My; mäyayä-by the maya.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa is is said:

     One who leaves Mathurä and is happy in to stay in some other place is a fool who, bewildered by My mäyä, wanders in this world of birth and death.

Text 64

skände mathura-khaëòe 
mathuräà ca parityajya
     yo 'nyatra kurute spåhäm
durbuddhes tasya kià jïänam
     ajïänena vimohitaù

     skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathura-khaëòe-Mathura'-khaëòa; mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; parityajya-leaving; yaù-who; anyatra-some other place; kurute-does; spåhäm-desire; durbuddheù-fool; tasya-of him; kim-what?; jïänam-knowledge; ajïänena-by ignorance; vimohitaù-bewildered.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     He who, although having attained Mathurä, desires to go somewhere else, is bewildered. What knowledge does he have? He is bewildered by ignorance.

Text 65

athägati-gatitvam. ädi-värähe 

mäträ piträ parityaktä
     ye tyaktä nija-bandhubhiù
yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi
     teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

     atha-now; agati-of they who have no shelter; gatitvam-the state of being the shelter; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mäträ-by mother; piträ-and father;û parityaktäh-abandoned; ye-who; tyaktä-abandoned; nija-bandhubhiù-by their own relatives; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere; gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

Mathurä Is the Shelter of the Shelterless

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     For they who are abandoned by mother, father, friends and relatives, and who have no shelter, Mathurä is a shelter. 

Text 66

päpa-räçibhir äkräntä
     ye däridrya-paräjitäù
yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi
     teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

     päpa-of sins; räçibhir-by hosts; äkräntäh-overpowered; ye-who; däridrya-by poverty; paräjitäù-defeated; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

     For they who are overpowered by a host of sins, and who are defeated by poverty and who have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter. 

Text 67

ye ca yoga-paribhrañöä
     ye tapo-däna-varjitäù
yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi
     teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

     ye-who; ca-and; yoga-paribhrañöä-fallen from yoga; ye-who; tapaù-austerity; däna-and charity; varjitäù-without; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

     For they who have fallen from the path of yoga, who have neither austerity nor charity, and who have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.  

Text 68

çruti-småti-vihénä ye
     çaucäcära-vivarjitäù
yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi
     teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

     çruti-småti-vihénä ye-who; çauca-äcära-vivarjitäù-without cleanliness; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

     For they who have no knowledge of çruti or småti, who have no purity, and have no shelter, Mathurä is a shelter.   

Text 69

särät särataraà sthänaà
     guhyänäà guhyam uttamam
gatim anveñamänänäà
     mäthure paramä gatiù

     särät-than the best; särataram-better; sthänam-place; guhyänäm-of secrets; guhyam-secret; uttamam-ultimate; gatim-destination; anvesamänänäm-of they who seek; mäthure-in Mathurä; paramä'supreme; gatiù-shelter.

     The ultimate, the supereme secret of all secrets, the goal for they who seek it, Mathura' is the supreme shelter.

Text 70

pade pade samäkräntä
     ye vipadbhir ahar-niçam
yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi
     teñäà madhu-puré gatiù

     pade pade-at every step; samäkräntäh-defeated; ye-who; vipadbhir-by calamities; ahar-niçam-day and night; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.

     For they who, at every step, day and night, are defeated by a host of calamities, and who have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.

Text 71

atha nitya-hari-sannidhänatvam. 

ädi-värähe mathuräyäù paraà kñetraà
     trailokye näpi vartate
yasmäd vasämy ahaà devi
     mathuräyäà tu sarvadä

     atha-now; nitya-eternally; hari-of Lord Kåñëa; sannidhänatvam-nearness; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; param-supreme; kñetram-place; trailokye-in the three worlds; na-not; api-even; vartate-is; yasmäd-because; vasämi-reside; aham-I; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; sarvadä-eternally.

Lord Hari Stays Eternally In Mathurä

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O goddess, because no place in the three worlds is superior to Mathurä, I eternally stay in Mathurä.

Text 72

aho 'ti-dhanyä mathurä
     yatra sannihito hariù
sarveñäà yatra päpänäà
     praveço na hi vidyate
     ahaù-Oh; ati-dhanyä-supremely opulent; mathurä-Mathurä; yatra-where; sannihitaù-stays; hariù'Kåñëa; sarveñäm-of all; yatra-where; päpänäm-sins; praveçaù-entance; na-not; hi-indeed; vidyate-is.

     Mathurä, where Lord Hari stayed, and where no sin can enter, is supremely opulent  

Text 73

pädme pätäla-khaëòe 

aho madhu-puré dhanyä
     yatra tiñöhati kaàsahä
tatra deva-muniù sarvo
     väsam icchati sarvadä

     pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; madhu-puré-Mathurä; dhanyä-opulent; yatra-where; tiñöhati'stays; kaàsahä-Kåñëa; tatra-there; deva-demigods; muniù-sages; sarvaù-all; väsam-residence; icchati'desire; sarvadä-eternally.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     In opulent Mathurä, where Lord Kåñëa stays, all the demigods and sages aspire to live eternally.

Text 74

çré-bhägavate prathamä-skände 

aho alaà çläghyatamaà yadoù kulaà
     aho alaà çläghyatamaà madhor vanam
yad eña puàsäm åñabhaù priyaù çréyaù
     sva-janmanä caìkramanena caïcati

     çré-bhägavate prathamä-skände-in Srimad-Bhagavatam, Canto One; ahaù-oh; alam-greatly; çläghyatamam-glorified; yadoù-of King Yadu; kulam-the dynasty; ahaù-oh; alam-greatly; çläghyatamam-glorified; madhor vanam-Mathurä; yad-which; eñah-He; puàsäm-of living beings; åñabhaù'the supreme leader; priyaù-the husband; çréyaù-of the goddess of fortune; sva-janmanä-by His birth; caìkramanena caïcati-wandered.

     In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.10.26 it is said:

     Oh, how supremely glorified is the dynasty of King Yadu, and how virtuous is the land of Mathurä, where the supreme leader all living beings, the husband of the goddess of fortune, has taken His birth and wandered in His childhood.*

Text 75

caturtha-skände 

tat täta gaccha bhadraà te
     yamunäyäs taöaà çucim
puëyaà madhuvanaà yatra
     sännidhyaà nityadä hareù

     caturtha-skände-in the Fourth Canto; tat-that; täta-my dear son; gaccha-go; bhadraàgood fortune; te-for you; yamunäyäù-of the Yamunä; taöam-bank; çucim-being purified; puëyam-the holy; madhuvanam-of the name Madhuvana; yatra-where; sännidhyaàbeing nearer; nityadä-always; hareù-of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 4.8.42 it is said:

     My dear boy, I therefore wish all good fortune to you. You should go to the bank of the Yamunä, where there is a virtuous forest named Madhuvana, and there be purified. Just by going there one draws nearer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who always lives there.*

Text 76

çré-daçame 

räjadhäné tataù säbhüt
     sarva-yädava-bhü-bhujäm
mathurä bhagavän yatra
     nityaà sannihito hariù

     çré-daçame-in the Tenth Canto; räjadhäné-the capitol; tataù-from that time; sä-the country and the city known as Mathurä; abhüt-became; sarva-yädava-bhü-bhujäm-of all the kings who appeared in the Yadu dynasty; mathurä-the place known as Mathurä; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yatra-wherein; nityam-eternally; sannihitaù-intimately connected, living eternally; hariù-the Lord, the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

     In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.1.28 it is said:

     Since that time, the city of Mathura' had been the capitol of all the kings of the Yadu dynasty. The city and district of Mathura' are very intimately connected with Kåñëa, for Lord Kåñëa lives there eternally.*

Text 77 

çré-viñëu-puräëe prathame 'àçe 

hatvä ca lavaëaà rakño-
     madhu-putraà mahä-balam
çatrughno mathuräà näma
     puréà tatra cakära vai

     çré-viñëu-puräëe-in Viñëu Puräëa; prathame aàçe-First Canto; hatvä-having killed; ca-and; lavaëam-Lavaëa; rakño madhu-putram-the son of the demon Madhu; mahä-balam-powerful; çatrughnaù-Çatrughna; mathuräm-Mathurä;û näma-named; purém-city; tatra-there; cakära-did; vai-indeed.

     In the Viñëu Puräëa, First Canto, it is said:

     This city is named Mathura' because Çatrughna here killed powerful Lavaëäsura, the son of the rakñasa Madhu.

Text 78

yatra vai deva-devasya
     sännidhyaà hari-medhasaù
sarva-päpa-hare tasmiàs
     tapas térthe cakära saù

     yatra-where; vai-indeed; deva-devasya-the master of the demigods; sännidhyam-nearness; hari-medhasaù-they who have fixed their hearts on Lord Hari; sarva-päpa-all sins;hare-removing; tasmin-there; tapaù-austerities; térthe'at the holy place; cakära-did; saù-he.

     He (Dhruva Mahäräja, performed austerities at this holy place, where all sins are destroyed, and where the the Supreme Personality of Godhead, on whom the devotees fiø their hearts, always stays.

Text 79

väyu-puräëe catvariàçad yojanänäà
     tatas tu mathurä småtä
yatra devo hariù säkñät
     svayaà tiñöhati sarvadä

     väyu-puräëe-in the Vayu Puräëa; catvariàçad-40; yojanänäm-yojanas; tataù-then; tu-indeed; mathurä-Mathurä; småtäù-remembered; yatra-where; devaù-Lord; hariù-Kåñëa; säkñät-directly; svayam-personally; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-eternally.

     In the Väyu Puräëa it is said:

     In Mathurä, which is 40 yojanas (320 miles, in measurement, Lord Hari stays eternally.

Text 80

atha çré-bhagavat-kåpä-labhyatvam. ädi-värähe 

na tat-puëyair na taj-jïänair
     na tapobhir na taj-japaiù
na labhyaà vividhair yajïair
     labhyaà mad-anubhävataù

     atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; kåpä-of the mercy; labhyatvam-attainment; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; na-not; tat-puëyair-with piety; na-not; taê-jïänair-by knowledge; na-not; tapobhir-by austerities; na-not; taê-japaiù-by japa» na-not; labhyam-attainable; vividhair-by various; yajïair-sacrifices; labhyam-attainable; mad-anubhävataù-by My mercy.

In Mathura' One May Attain the Mercy of the the Supreme Personality of Godhead

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Not by great expertise, not by transcendental knowledge, not by austerities, not by chanting mantras and not by performing many yajïas, but only by my mercy is Mathurä attained.

Text 81

çré-viñëoù kåpayä nünaà
     tatra väso bhaviñyati
vinä viñëoù prasädena
     kñaëam ekaà na tiñöhati

     çré-viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; kåpayä-by the mercy; nünam-indeed; tatra-there; väsaù-residence; bhaviñyati-will be; vinä-without; viñëoù-of Viñëu; prasädena-by the mercy; kñaëam-moment; ekam-one; na-not; tiñöhati-stays.

     By the mercy of Çré Viñëu one attains residence in Mathura'. Without Viñëu's mercy one cannot stay for even ñ moment in Mathurä.

Text 82

pädme uttara-khaëòe 
harau yeñäà sthirä bhaktir
     bhüyasé yeñu tat-kåpä
teñäm eva hi dhanyänäà
     mathuräyäà bhaved ratiù

     pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; uttara-khaëòe-Uttara-khaëòa; harau-to Lord Hari; yeñäm-of whom; sthirä-steady; bhaktir-devotion; bhüyasé-great; yeñu'in whom; tat-kåpä-His mercy; teñäm-of them; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; dhanyänäm-fortunate; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; bhaved'is; ratiù-pleasure.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

     The fortunate souls who have firm devotion for Lord Hari, and who have attained His great mercy, take pleasure in Mathurä.  

Text 83

atha bhagavad-dhyänädi-labhyatvam. ädi-värähe 

yadä viçuddhas tapa-ädinä janäù
     çubhäçrayä dhyäna-dhana nirantaram
tadaiva paçyanti mamottamäà puréà
     na canyathä kalpa-çatair dvijottama

     atha-now; bhagavad-on the Lord; dhyäna-meditation; ädi-beginning with; labhyatvam-attainable; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yadä'when; viçuddhaù-pure; tapah-austerity; ädinä-beginning with; janäù-people; çubha-pure; çrayäh-hearts; dhyäna-dhana-wealthy with meditation; nirantaram-always; tadä-then; eva-indeed; paçyanti-see; mama-My; uttamäm-supreme; purém-city; na-not; ca-and; anyathä-otherwise; kalpa-çatair-with hundreds of kalpas; dvijottama-O best of the dvijas.

Mathura' Can Be Attained By One Who Meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is saidL:

     O best of the brähmaëas, living entities who are purified by austerity and other spiritual practices, who hearts are filled with auspicious things, and who are fixed in constant meditation on Me, are able to see my supreme city of Mathura'. Others cannot see it in millions of kalpas.

Text 84 

mokña-pradatvam. ädi-värähe 
yä gatir yoga-yuktasya
     brahmajïasya manéñinaù
sä gatis tyajataù präëän
     mathuräyäà narasya ca

     mokña-liberation; pradatvam-granting; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yä-which; gatir-destination; yoga-yuktasya-of one engaged in yoga; brahmajïasya-who knows brahman; manéñinaù-wise; sä-that; gatiù-destination; tyajataù-giving up; präëän-life; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; narasya-of a person; ca-and.

Mathurä Grants Liberation

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     The spiritual desintation attained by one who practices yoga, one who knows Brahman, or one who is a thoughtful philosospher, is also attained by a person who passes from this life in Mathurä.

Text 85

térthe caiva gåhe väpi
     catvare pathi caiva hi
yatra tatra måtä devi
     muktià yänti na cänyathä

     térthe-at this holy place; ca-and; eva-indeed; gåhe-at home; vä-or; api-and; catvare-in a courtyard; pathi-on the road; ca-and; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; yatra-where; tatra-there; måtäù-after death; devi-O goddess; muktim-liberation; yänti-attain; na-not; ca-and; anyathä-otherwise.

     O goddess, they who die in this holy place in a home here, in a courtyard, or on the road, attain liberation without any doubt.

Text 86

käçy-ädi-puryo yadi santi loke
     täsäà tu madhye mathuraiva dhanyä
yä janma-mauïjé-vrata-måtyu-dähair
     nåëäà caturdhä vidadhäti mokñam

     käçy-ädi-puryaù-beginning with Väräëasé; yadi-if; santi-are; loke-in the world; täsäm-of them; tu-indeed; madhye-in the midst; mathurä-Mathurä; eva-indeed; dhanyä-opulent; yä-which; janma-birth; mauïjé-vrata-brahminical initiation; måtyu-of death; dähair-by the fires; nåëäm-of people; caturdhä-in four» vidadhäti-grants; mokñam-liberation.

     If Väräëasé and other holy cities were assemnbled together on this earth Mathurä would be the greatest and most opulent amongst them. With the fires of birth, death, or brahmnical initiation within its boundaries, Mathura' grants the four kinds of liberation.

Text 87

na yogair yä gatir labhyä
     manvantara-çatair api
anyatra helayä sätra
     labhayte mat-prasädataù

     na-not; yogair-by yoga; yä-which; gatir-destination; labhyä-is attained; manvantara-çatair-in hundreds of Manvantaras; api-even; anyatra-in another place; helayä-easily; sä-that; atra-here; labhayte-is attained; mat-prasädataù-by My mercy.

     The spiritual destination that in another place cannot be attained byt practicieng yoga for thousands of manvantaras is attainable by My mercy very easily in this place.

Text 88

na päpebhyo bhayaà yatra
     na bhayaà yatra vai yamät
na garbha-väsa-bhér yatra
     tat kñetraà ko na saàçrayet

     na-not; päpebhyaù-of sins; bhayam-fear; yatra-where; na-not; bhayam-fear; yatra-where; vai'indeed; yamät-of yama; na-not; garbha-väsa-of residence in a mother's womb; bhér-fear; yatra-where; tat kñetram-that place; kaù-who?; na-not; saàçrayet-will take shelter.

     Who will not take shelter of this holy place where there is no fear of sin, no fear of Yamaräja, and no fear of residing again in a mother's womb.

Text 89

vinä saìkhyena yogena
     vinä svätma-vicintanam
vinä vrata-tapo-dänaiù
     çreyo vai präëinäm iha

     vinä-without; saìkhyena-sankhya; yogena-yoga; vinä-without; svätma-vicintanam-meditation on the Self; vinä-without; vrata-vows; tapaù-austerities; dänaiù-and charity; çreyaù-benediction; vai-indeed; präëinäm-of the,living entities; iha-here.

     Withyout saìkhya, without yoga, without meditation on the Self, and without vows, austerities or charity, the living entities here attain the greatest benediction.

Text 90

kåmi-kéöa-pataìgädya
     mathuräyäà måta hi ye
külät patanti ye våkñäs
     te 'pi yänti paräà gatim

     kåmi-worms; kéöa-insects; pataìga-birds; ädya-beginning with; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; måta hi-indeed; ye-who; külät-from the riverbanks; patanti'fall; ye-who; våkñäùtrees; te-they; api-even; yänti-attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.

     The worms, insects, birds, and other creatures who die here and the trees that fall down from the riverbanks here, all attain the supreme destination.

Text 91

värähe 

viàça-yojana-vistäro
     mathuräyäç ca maëòalam
yatra präëän vimuïcanti
     siddhä yänti paräà gatim

     värähe-in the varäha Puräëa; viàça-yojana-vistäraù-20 yojanas in size; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; ca-and; maëòalam'circle; yatra-where; präëän-life; vimuïcanti-abandon; siddhäh-perfect; yänti-attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

     They who die in the twenty-yojana (160 miles, area of Mathura' become perfect and attain the supreme destination.

Text 92

pädme pätäla-khaëòe 

caëòäla-jaòa-mükänäà
     jéva-hiàsä-ratasya ca
mathurä-piëòa-dänena
     punar janma na vidyate
     pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; caëòäla-outcaste; jaòa-fool; mükänäm-deaf-mute; jéva-hiàsä-ratasya-sadist; ca-and; mathurä-in Mathurä; piëòa-dänena-by offering piëòa; punar-again; janma-birth; na-not; vidyate-is.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     There is no next birth for an outcaste, a fool, a deaf-mute, or a sadist, that offers piëòa in Mathurä.

Text 93

praëälyäm iñöa-khacite
     çmaçäne vyomni maïcake
aööäle vä måto devi
     mäthure muktim äpnuyuù

     praëälyäm-in a ditch; iñöa-khacite-ina brick-house; çmaçäne-at a crematorium; vyomni-in the sky; maïcake'on a throne; aööäle-in a palace; vä-or; måtaù-dying; devi-O goddess; mäthure-in Mathurä; muktim-liberation; äpnuyuù-attain.

     Dying in Mathurä, whether in a ditch, in a brick-house, at a crematorium, in the sky, on a throne, or in a palace, one attains liberation.

Text 94-95

vämana-puräëe

mathurä-tértham atulaà
     viçrutaà loka-sat-kåtam
yatra kåñëas tu gopälaiù
     samaà kréòitavan jale

tatra gatvä naro brahman
     mucyate sarva-pätakaiù
tri-rätram uñitas tatra
     nirähäro jitendriyaù
viharantaà jale kåñëaà
     dhyäyan mukto bhaven naraù

     vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Puräëa; mathurä-tértham-Mathurä; atulam-peerless; viçrutam-famous; loka-sat-kåtam-honored in the world; yatra-where; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; tu-indeed; gopälaiù-the gopas; samam-with; kréòitavan-played; jale-in the water; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; brahman-O brähmaëa; mucyate-is freed; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins; tri-rätram-for three nights; uñitaù-residing; tatra-there; nirähäraù-fasting; jitendriyaù-controlling the senses; viharantam-playing; jale-in the water; kåñëam-on Lord Kåñëa; dhyäyan-meditating; muktaù-liberated; bhavet-becomes; naraù-a person.

In the Vämana Puräëa it is said:

     A person who goes to peerless, famous, honored-in-all-the-worlds Mathurä-tértha, where Kåñëa played in the water with the gopas, becomes free from all sins, O brähmaëa. A person who, fasting, controlling his senses, and meditating on Kåñëa playing in the water, stays there for three nights, becomes liberated.         

Text 96

saura-puräëe

astéha mathurä näma
     tréñu lokeñu viçrutä
kåñëa-päda-rajo-miçra-
     bälukäpüta-véthikä
sparçanena naras tasya
     mucyate sarva-bandhanät

     saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; asti-is; iha-here; mathurä-Mathurä; näma-named; tréñu lokeñu-in the three worlds; viçrutä-famous; kåñëa-of Kåñëa; päda-of the feet; rajaù-with the dust; miçra-mixed; bälukäpüta-véthikä-purified pathways; sparçanena-by the touch; naraù-a person; tasya-of that; mucyate-is liberated; sarva-bandhanät-from all bonds.

In the Çaura Purän„a it is said:

     Here is the place named Mathurä, famous in the three worlds, and its pathways purified by dust mixed with the dust of Kåñëa's feet. By its touch a person becomes liberated from all bondage.

Text 97

mathurä-khaëòe 

mathuräyäà vasiñyämi
     yasyämi mathurä-purém
iti yasya bhaved buddhiù
     so 'pi bandhäd vimucyate

     mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vasiñyämi-I will live; yasyämi-I will go; mathurä-purém-to Mathurä; iti-thus; yasya-of whom; bhaved-may be; buddhiù-conception; saù api-he; bandhäd-from bondage; vimucyate-is liberated.

In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

     I will live in Mathurä. I will go to Mathurä. A person who thinks in this way becomes free from material bondage.

Text 98

atha viñëu-loka-pradatvam. brahmäëòe 

ye paçyanty acyutaà devaà
     mäthure devaké-sutam
te viñëu-lokam äsädya
     na cyavante kadäcana

     atha-now; viñëu-loka-Viñëuloka; pradatvam-giving; brahmäëòe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; ye-who; paçyanti-see; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; devam-Lord; mäthure-in Mathurä; devaké-sutam-the son of Devaké; te-they; viñëu-lokam-Viñëuloka; äsädya'attaining; na-not; cyavante-fall down; kadäcana-ever.

Mathurä Grants Residence in Viñëuloka

In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

     They who in Mathurä see the Deity of Devaké's son, the spog who never falls down, attain Viñëuloka and never fall down.

Text 99

yäträà karoti kåñëasya
     çraddhayä yaù samähitaù
sarva-päpair vinirmukto
     viñëulokaà sa gacchati

     yäträm-journey; karoti-does; kåñëasya-in Kåñëa; çraddhayä-with faith; yaù-who; samähitaù'assembled; sarva-päpair-from all sins; vinirmuktaù-free; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     A person who, filled with faith in Lord Kåñëa, goes on a journey there, becomes free from all sins and goes to Viñëuloka.

Text 100

mükä jaòändha-vadhiräs
     tapo-niyama-varjitäù
kälenaiva måtä ye ca
     gacchanti viñëu-mandiram
     mükäh-dumb; jaòa-foolish; andha-blind; vadhiräùand deaf; tapo-niyama-varjitäù-without austerity; kälena-in time; eva-indeed; måtäù-after death; ye-who; ca-and; gacchanti-go;û viñëu-mandiram-the palace of Lord Viñëu.

     The deaf, dumb, blind, foolish, and they who hasve no austerity or sense-control, who in the course of time die in Mathurä, go to Lord Viñëu's palace.

Text 101

sarpa-dañöäù paçu-hatäù
     pävakämbu-vinäçitäù
labdhäpa-måtyavo ye ca
     mäthure hari-loka-gäù

     sarpa-by a snake; dañöäù-bitten; paçu-by a wild beast; hatäù-killed;  pävaka-by fire; ambu-or water; vinäçitäù-killed; labdhäpa-måtyavaù-who die; ye-who; ca-and; mäthure-in Mathurä; hari-loka-to Lord Hari's planet; gäù-go.

     They who, bitten by a snake, killed by a wild beast, consumed by flames, or drowned in water, die in Mathurä, attain the planet of Lord Hari.

Text 102

ädi-värähe 

kalpa-grämeëa kià tasya
     väräëasyä ca vä çubhe
mathuräyäà tu yat puëyaà
     tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; kalpa-grämeëa-for many kalpas; kim-what is the use?; tasya-of that; väräëasyäh-at varanasi; ca-and; vä'or; çubhe-O beautiful one; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; yat-that; puëyam-piety; tasya-of that; puëya-phalam-pious result; çåëu

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     "What is the use of living for many kalpas at Väräëasé, O beautiful one, when the same pious result is easily attained at Mathurä? Listen, and I will tell you of that pious result.

Text 103

mathuräà ca samäsädyä     yaù kaçcid måyate bhuvi
api kéöaù pataìgo vä
     jäyate sa caturbhujaù

     mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; samäsädya-attaining; yaù kaçcid-someone; måyate-dies; bhuvi-in this world; api-even; kéöaù'a worm or a bug; pataìgaù-a moth or a bird; vä-or; jäyate-is born; sah-he; caturbhujaù-with four arms.

     A human, worm, insect, moth, or bird who goes to Mathura' and dies there, becomes reborn as a four-armed resident of the spiritual world.

Text 104

gautaméya-tantre 

mathnäti sarva-päpäni
     dadäti paramäà gatim
uttamo hi naro yatra
     tena sä mathurä småtä

     gautaméya-tantre-in the gautaméya Tantra; mathnäti-crushes; sarva-all; päpäni-sins; dadäti'gives; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination; uttamaù-ultimate; hi-indeed; naraù-a person; yatra-where; tena-by him; sä-this; mathurä-Mathurä; småtä-remembered.

     In the Gautaméya-tantra it is said:

     The place that crushes (math, all sins and grants the supreme destination where the Supreme Person resides, is known as Mathurä.

Text 105

sarväbhiñöa-pradatvam. brahmäëòa-puräëe 

satyaà satyaà muni-çreñöha
     brüve çapatha-pürvakam
sarväbhiñöa-pradaà nänyan
     mathuräyäù samaà kvacit

     sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires; pradatvam-giving; brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the brahmäëòa Puräëa; satyam-true; satyam-true; muni-sages;çreñöha-best; brüve-I say; çapatha-pürvakam-with a vow; sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires;pradam-giving; na-not; anyat-another; mathuräyäù-to Mathurä; samam-equal; kvacit-anywhere.

Mathura' Fulfills All Desireñ
     In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

     It is true! It is true! O sage, I vow that it is true! No other place fulfills all desires as Mathura' does!

Text 106

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

kñetra-pälo mahä-devo
     vartate yatra sarvadä
yatra viçränti-térthaà ca
     tatra kià durlabhaà phalam     

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; kñetra-pälaù-protector; mahä-devaù-Mahädeva; vartate-is; yatra-where; sarvadä-always; yatra-where; viçränti-tértham-Viçränti-tértha; ca-and; tatra-there; kim-what?; durlabham-difficult to attain; phalam-result.     

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:
     
     In Mathurä, where the Supreme Lord is the all-pervading protector, and where there are places of His transcendental pastimes, what result is difficult to attain?

Text 107

padmottara-khaëòe 

tri-varga-dä käminäà yä
     mumukñüëäà ca mokñadä
bhaktécchor bhaktidä kas taà
     mathuräà näçrayed budhaù

     padmottara-khaëòe-in Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; tri-varga-dä-giving the three goals; käminäm-of they who desire; yä-which; mumukñüëäm-of they who wish liberation; ca-and; mokñadä-giver of liberation; bhakti-icchor-of one who desires bhakti; bhaktidä-giver of bhakti; kaù-who?; tam-this; mathuräm-Mathurä; na-not; äçrayed-takes shelter; budhaù-wise.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

     What wise man would not take shelter of of Mathurä, which gives the three goals of life to they who desire them, which gives liberation to they who hanker after liberation, and which gives devotional service to they who desire devotional service?

Text 108

tatraiva pätäla-khaëòe pärvaté-praçnaù

uktodbhütaç ca mahimä
     mathuräyä jaöädhara
muner bhuvo vä saritaù
     prabhavaù kena vä vibho
kåñëasya vä prabhävo 'yaà
     samyogasya pratäpavän

     tatra-there;iva-like; pätäla-khaëòe-in thre Patala-khaëòa; pärvaté-praçnaù-Parvati's question; ukta-said; udbhütaù-manifested; ca-and; mahimä-glory; mathuräyä-of Mathurä; jaöädhara-O Çiva; muner-of the sage; bhuvaù-of the world; vä-or; saritaù-of the rivers; prabhavaù-glory; kena-by what?; vä-or; vibhaù-O Lord; kåñëasya-of Kåñëa; vä-or; prabhävaù-glory; ayam-this; samyogasya-contact; pratäpavän-powerful.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, Pärvaté asks the following question:

     O Jaöädhara, You have already described the glory of Mathurä. What is the glory of the sages, the ground, and the rivers there? What is the great glory of Kåñëa there?

Text 109

tatraiva çré-mahädevottaram 

na bhümika-prabhävaç ca
     sarito vä varänane
åñinäà na prabhävaç ca
     prabhävo viñëu-tärake

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-mahädeva-Lord Mahädeva's uttaram-reply; na-not; bhümika-of ground; prabhävaù-glory; ca-and; saritaù-of rivers; vä-or; varänane-O girl with the beautiful face; åñinäm-of sages; na-not; prabhävaù-glory; ca-and; prabhävaù-glory; viñëu-tärake-of Lord Viñëu's täraka potency.

     Çré Mahädeva replied:

     O girl with a beautiful face, this is not the glory of ordinary ground, rivers, and sages. This is the glory of Lord Viñëu's täraka potency. 

Text 110

tathä päraka-cic-chakter
     ubhe tat-pada-kärake
tad eva çåëu bho devi
     prabhävo yena vartate

     tathä-so; päraka-cé-chakter-from the päraka potency; ubhe-both; tat-pada-kärake-cause; tad-this; eva-indeed; çåëu-hear; bhaù-O; devi-O goddess; prabhävaù-glory; yena-how;û vartate-is.

     The glory here is also manifest from the spiritual päraka potency. O goddess, please hear of these two potencies.

Text 111

çré-kåñëa-mahimä sarvas
     cic-chakter yaù pravartate
tärakaà pärakaà tasya
     prabhävo 'yam anähataù
tarakäê jäyate muktiù
     prema-bhaktiç ca pärakaö

     çré-kåñëa-of Kåñëa; mahimä-glory; sarvaùall; cé-chakter-spiritual potency; yaù-who; pravartate-is; tärakam-täraka; pärakam-päraka; tasya-of that; prabhävaù-glory; ayam-this; anähataù-glorious; tarakäj-from täraka; jäyate-is born; muktiù-liberation; prema-bhaktiù-pure devotional service; ca-and; pärakaö-from päraka.

     All Kåñëa's glories are manifest from His spiritual potency. His glories are His täraka potency and His päraka potency. From His täraka potency liberation is manifest. From His päraka potency loöing devotional service is manifest. 

Text 112

tatraiva çré-bhagavad-väkyam 

ubhau manträö ubhe nämni
     madéya-präëa-vallabhe
nänä-nämäni manträç ca
     tan-madhye säram ucyate

     tatra-there;iva çré-bhagavad-of the Lord; väkyam-words; ubhau-both; manträv-mantras; ubhe-âoth; nämni-names; madéya-My; präëa-life; vallabhe-dear; nänä-various; nämäni-names; manträù-mantras; ca-and; tan-madhye'in the midst; säram-best; ucyate-is said.

     There also the Supreme Lord says:

     O girl more dear to me than life, in this way there are two mantras and two names. Among all mantras and names they are said to be the best.

Text 113

ajïätam athava jïätaà
     tärakaà japate yadi
yatra tatra bhaven måtyuù
     käçyäà tu phalam ädiçet

     ajïätam-not known; athavä-or; jïätam-known; tärakam-täraka; japate-chants; yadi'if; yatra-where; tatra-there; bhavet-is; måtyuù-death; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; tu-indeed; phalam'result; ädiçet-shows.

     If a person knowingly or unkowingly chants the täraka mantra, then no matter where he dies, he attains the result of dying in Väräëasé.

Text 114

vartate yasya jihvägre
     sa pumäl loka-pävanaù
chinatti sarva-päpäni
     käçé-väsa-phalaà labhet

     vartate-is; yasya-of whom; jihvägre-on the tip of the tongue; sah-he; pumän-person; loka-pävanaù-purifying the world; chinatti-cuts; sarva-all; päpäni-sins; käçé-in Väräëasé; väsa-residence; phalam-result; labhet-attains.

     He on whose tongue the name täraka appears, purifies the people of the worlds. He breaks all sins. He attains the result of living at Väräëasé.

Text 115

iti täraka-mantro 'yaà
     yas tu käçyäà pravartate
sa eva mäthure devi
     vartate 'tra varänane

     iti-thus; täraka-mantro ayam-this täraka mantra; yaù-who; tu-indeed; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; pravartate'is; sah-he; eva-indeed; mäthure-in Mathurä; devi-O goddess; vartate-is; atra-here; varänane-O girl with the beautiful face.

     O goddess, O girl with the beautiful face, even though he lives in Väräëasé, a person who chants this täraka mantra actually lives here in Mathurä.

Text 116

atha pärakaà ucyeta
     yathä-mantraà yathä-balam
pärakaà yatra varteta
     åddhi-siddhi-samägamaù

     atha-now; pärakam-päraka; ucyeta-is said; yathä-as; mantram-mantra; yathä-balam-as far as there is power; pärakam-päraka; yatra-where; varteta-is; åddhi-siddhi-samägamaù-powers and opulences.

     When the powerful päraka mantra is chanted, spiritual opulences and perfections appear.

Text 117

püjyo bhavati trailokye
     çatäyur jäyate pumän
añöa-siddhi-samäyukto
     vartate yatra pärakam

     püjyaù-worshiped; bhavati-is; trailokye-in the three worlds; çatäyur-a life of 100 years; jäyate-is âorn; pumän'person; añöa-siddhi-samäyuktaù-with the 8 mysté powers; vartate-is; yatra-where; pärakam-päraka.

     A person who chants the päraka mantra becomes worshiped by the three worlds. He lives for a hundred years. He attains the eight perfections. 

Text 118

pärakaà yasya jihvägre
     tasya santoña-vartitä
paripürëo bhavet kämaù
     satya-saìkalpatä tathä

     pärakam-päraka; yasya-of whom; jihvägre-on the tongue; tasya-of him; santoña-vartitähappiness; paripürëaù-full; bhavet-is; kämaù-desire; satya-saìkalpatä-wishes become true; tathä-as.

     A person who places the päraka mantra on the tip of his tongue becomes happy. His desires become fulfilled. 

Text 119

dvi-vidhä prema-bhaktis tü     çrutä dåñöä tathaiva ca
akhaëòa-paramänandas
     tad-gato jïeya-lakñaëaù

     dvi-vidhä-two kinds; prema-bhaktiù-loving devotion; tu-indeed; çrutä-heard; dåñöä-seen; tathä-so; eva-indeed; ca-and; akhaëòa-unbroken; parama-änandaùbliss; tad-gataù-attained; jïeya-lakñaëaù-known.

     Prema-bhakti (devotional service in pure love of God, is of two kinds: that attained by hearing about Me and that attained by seeing Me. A person who has thus fallen in love with Me becomes filled with a bliss that never breaks.

Text 120

açru-pätaà kvacin nåtyaà
     kvacit premäti-vihvalaù
kvacit tasya mahä-mürcchä
     mad-guëo géyate kvacit

     açru-pätam-shedding tears; kvacit-sometimes; nåtyam-dancing; kvacit-sometimes; premäti-vihvalaù-overcome with love; kvacit-sometimes; tasya-of him; mahä-mürcchä-fainting; mad-guëaù-My virtues; géyate-glorified; kvacit-sometimes.

     Sometimes he sheds tears. Sometimes he dances. Sometimes he becomes overcome with love. Sometimes he faints. Sometimes he glorifies Me in song.

Text 121

atha prapaïcätétam. ädi-värähe 

anyaiva käcit sä såçöir
     vidhätur vyatirekiëé
na yat kñetra-guëän vaktum
     éçvaro 'péçvaro yataù

     atha-now; prapaïca-the material world; atétam-beyond; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anya-another eva-indeed; käcit-certain; sä-it; såçöir-creation; vidhätur-of the creator; vyatirekiëé-distinguished; na-not; yat-what; kñetra-of the place; guëän-virtues; vaktum-to describe» éçvaraù-able; api-even; éçvaraù-Çiva; yataù-because.

Mathura' is Beyond the Material World of Five Elements

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:
     Mathura' was not created by Brahmä. Even Lord Çiva has not the power to properly describe Mathurä's glories.

Text 122

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

tan-maëòalaà mäthuraà hi
     viñëu-cakropari sthitam
padmäkäraà sadä tatra
     vartate çäçvataà nåpa

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tan-maëòalam- mäthuram-the circle of Mathurä; hi-indeed; viñëu-cakra-upari-above Lord Viñëu's circle; sthitam-situated; padma-äkäram-in the form of a lotus; sadä-always; tatra-there; vartate-is; çäçvatam-eternaly; nåpa-O king.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     O king, this circle of Mathurä is like a lotus eternally above the circle of Lord Viñëu's realm.

Text 123

pädme pätäla-khaëòe 

åñir mäthura-nämatra
     tapaù kurvati çäçvate
tato 'sya mäthuraà nämä-
     bhavad äòhyaà çriyä yutam

     pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; åñir-sage; mäthura-näma-named Mäthura; atra-here; tapaù kurvati-performs austerities; çäçvate-always; tataù-therefore; asya-of him; mäthuram-Mathurä; näma-name; abhavad-was; äòhyam-enriched; çriyä-the goddess of fortune; yutam-with.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     A sage named Mäthura performed austerities there for a long time. Beautiful Mathurä is named after him.

Text 124

tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe 

nityaà me mathuräà viddhi
     vanaà våndävanaà tathä
yamunäà gopa-kanyaç ca 
     tathä gopäla-bälakän
     tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirväëa-khaëòa; nityam-always; me-My; mathuräm-Mathurä; viddhi-know; vanam-forest; våndävanam-Vrndavana; tathä-so; yamunäm-Yamunä; gopa-kanyaù-gopés; ca-and; tathä-so; gopäla-bälakän-gopa boys.

     In that same book, in the Nirväëa-khaëòa, it is said:

     Know that My Mathurä is eternal. So also is Våndävana forest. So also are the Yamunä, the gopés, and the gopa boys.

Text 125

aho na jänanti narä duräçayäù
     purià madéyäà paramäà sanätaném
surendra-nägendra-munéndra-saàstutäà
     manoramäà täà mathuräà paräà gatém

     ahaù-Oh; na-not; jänanti-know; naräh-people; duräçayäù-wicked; purim-city; madéyäm-My; paramäm-supreme; sanätaném-eternal; surendra-leaders of the demigods; nägendra-leaders of the nagas; munéndra-leaders of the sages; saàstutäm-glorified; manoramäm-enchanting; täm- mathuräm-this Mathurä; paräm- gatém-the supreme destination.

     Wicked men cannot understand My eternal, beautiful, transcendental city of Mathurä, which is the supreme destination, and which is glorified by the kings of the demigods, nägas, and sages.

Text 126

atha deva-traya-rüpatvam. pädme pätäla-khaëòe

ma-käre ca u-käre ca
     a-käre cänta-saàsthite
mäthuraù çabda-niñpanna
     om-kärasya tataù samaù

     atha-now; deva-traya-rüpatvam-the form of the three demigods; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ma-käre-the syllable ma; ca-and; u-käre-the syllable u; ca-and; a-käre-the syllable a; ca-and; anta-saàsthite-at the end; mäthuraù-Mathurä; çabda-niñpanna-as sound; om-kärasya-of om; tataù-to that; samaù-equal.

     Mathura' Is the Form of the Three Deities

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:
     Mathura' is the same as the syllable aum. The a, u, and m in aumkara come from the same letters in the word Mathurä.

Text 127

mahä-rüdro ma-käraù syäd
     u-käro viñëu-saàjïakaù
a-käro 'ntyas tu brahmä syät
     tri-çabdaà mäthuraà bhavet

     mahä-rüdraù-Çiva; ma-käraù-the letter m; syäd-is; u-käraù-the letter u; viñëu-saàjïakaù-is Viñëu; a-käraù-the letter a; antyaù-at the end; tu-indeed; brahmä-Brahmä; syät-is; tri-three; çabdam-sounds; mäthuram-Mathurä; bhavet-is.

     In the syllable aum the m is Lord Çiva, the u is Lord Viñëu, and the a is Lord Brahmä. These three letters are the same as Mathurä.

Text 128

tadä varaù çreñöha uktaù
     satya eväbhavat tataù
sä tri-devamayé mürtir
    mäthuré tiñöhate sadä

     tadä-then; varaù çreñöhah-the best; uktaù-said; satye-in truth; eva-indeed; abhavat-was; tataù-then; sä-that; tri-devamayé-the three demigods; mürtir-form; mäthuré-Mathurä; tiñöhate-stands; sadä-always.

     Of these this is the best statement. Of these this is the truth. Mathura' is eternally the form of these three demigods.

Text 129

atha çré-viñëu-bhakti-pradatvam. pädme uttara-khaëòe

anyeñu puëya-tértheñu
     muktir eva mahä-phalam
muktaiù prärthya harer bhaktir
     mathuräyäà ca labhyate

     atha-now; çré-viñëu-to Lord Viñëu; bhakti-devotion; pradatvam-giving; pädme uttara-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; anyeñu-in other; puëya-tértheñu-holy places; muktir-liberation; eva-indeed; mahä-phalam-great result; muktaiù-by the liberated; prärthya-requested; harer-of Lord Hari; bhaktir-devotion; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; labhyate-is attained.

Mathura' Gives Lord Viñëu's Devotional Service

     In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa it is said:
     
     Liberation is the great result attained at other holy places. Devotional service to Lord Hari, for which the liberated souls pray, is attained at Mathurä.

Text 130 

tri-rätram api ye tatra
     vasanti manujä mune
harir dadyät sukhaà teñäà
     muktänäm api durlabham

     tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-persons; mune'O sage; harir-Hari; dadyät-gives; sukham-happiness; teñäm-to them; muktänäm-liberated; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain.

     O sage, to they who stay there for three nights, Lord Hari happily gives what even the liberated souls cannot attain.

Text 131

brahmäëòa-puräëe 

trailokya-varti-térthänäà
     sevanäd durlabhä hi yä
paränandamayé siddhir
     mathurä-sparça-mätrataù

     brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; trailokya-varti-in the three worlds; térthänäm-of the holy places; sevanäd-by service; durlabhä-rare; hi-indeed; yä-which; paränandamayé-blissful; siddhir-perfection; mathurä-of Mathurä; sparça-mätrataù-simply by the touch.

     In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

     The blissful perfection difficult to attain by serving all holy places in the three worlds is attained by simply touching Mathurä.

Text 132

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

smaranti mathuräà ye cä     mäthureçaà viçämpate
sarva-tértha-phalaà teñäà
     syäc ca bhaktir harau parä

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; smaranti-meditiate; mathuräm-on Mathurä; ye-who; ca-and; mäthureçam-Mathurä's king; viçämpate-O king; sarva-tértha-phalam-result of all holy places;; teñäm-of them; syäc-is; ca-and; bhaktir-devotion; harau-to Lord Hari; parä-supreme.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura-khaëòa, it is said:

     O king, they who meditate on the king of Mathura' attain transcendental devotion to Lord Hari, which is the fruit of all pilgrimages.

Text 133

atha svataù parama-phalatvam. pädme pätäla-khaëòe

aho madhu-puré dhanyä
     vaikuëöhäc ca garéyasé
dinam ekaà niväsena
     harau bhaktiù prajäyate

     atha-now; svataù-personally; parama-phalatvam-the greatest result; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; madhu-puré-Mathurä; dhanyä-opulent; vaikuëöhäc-than Vaikuëöha; ca-and; garéyasé-greatesr; dinam-day; ekam-one; niväsena-by residence; harau'for Lord Hari; bhaktiù-devotion; prajäyate-is born.

Mathura' Gives the Greatest Result

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     Opulent Mathura' is greater than Vaikuëöha. Living there for a single day creates genuine devotion to Lord Hari.

Text 134

atha sapta-puréëäà tu
     sarvotkåñöaà tu mäthuram
çrüyatäà mahimä devi
     vaikuëöha-bhuvanottamaù

     atha-now; sapta-7; puréëäm-of the cities; tu-indeed; sarva-utkåñöam-best of all; tu-indeed; mäthuram'Mathurä; çrüyatäm-should be heard; mahimä-glory; devi-O goddess; vaikuëöha-in thre spiritual world;bhuvana-abode; uttamaù-highest.

     Mathura' is the best of the seven holy cities. O goddess, please hear of its glories greater than Vaikuëöha.

Text 135

ädi-värähe 

bhür-bhuvah-svas-tale väpi
     na pätäla-tale 'malam
nordhva-loke mayä dåñöaà
     tädåk kñetraà vasundhare

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; bhür-bhuvah-svas-tale-on Bhur, Bhuvar, and Svar; vä-or; api-and; na-not; pätäla-tale'in hell; amalam-pure; na-not; ürdhva-loke-in the higher world; mayä-by Me; dåñöam-seen; tädåk-like this; kñetram-a pläe; vasundhare-O earth.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Not in Bhürloka, Bhuvarloka, Svarloka, Pätälaloka, or Urdhvaloka have I seen any place like this, O earth-goddess.

Text 136

värähe 

labhänäà mathurä-läbho
     jïänänäà jïänam uttamam
priténäà paramä pritir
     gaténäà gatir uttamä

     värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; labhänäm-of attainments; mathurä-of Mathurä; läbhaù-the attainment» jïänänäm-of knowledges; jïänam-knowledge; uttamam-utlimate; priténäm-of loves; paramä-ultimate; pritir-love; gaténäm-of goals; gatir-goal; uttamä-ultimate.

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:     

     Attainment of Mathura' is the greatest of attainments. Knowledge of Mathura' is the greatest of knowledges. Love for Mathura' is the greatest of loves. The goal of Mathura' is the greatest of goals.

Text 137

rahasyänäà rahasyaà ca
     kriyänäà ca mahä-kriyä
etan maraëa-käle tu
     smartavyaà manasäpi ca
yadécchet paramäà siddhià
     saàsärasya ca mokñaëam 
     rahasyänäm-of secrets; rahasyam-the secret; ca-and; kriyänäm-of actions; ca-and; mahä-kriyä-greatest action; etat-this; maraëa-käle-at the time of death; tu-indeed; smartavyam-should be remembered; manasä-by the heart; api-and; ca-and; yadi-if; icchet-desires; paramäm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; saàsärasya-of the material world; ca-and; mokñaëam-liberation. 

     The secret of Mathura' is the greatest secret. Actions in Mathura' are the greatest actions. If one yearns for the supreme perfection and release from the cycle of birth and death, he should, with all his heart, meditate on Mathura' at the time of his death.

Text 138   

atha mathurä-maëòala-sémäjïänam. ädi-värähe

viàçatir yojanänäà tu
     mäthuraà mama maëòalam

     atha-now; mathurä-maëòala-of the circle of Mathurä; séma-boundaries; jïänam-boundaries are unknown; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viàçatir'20; yojanänäm-of yojanas; tu-indeed; mäthuram-Mathura' mama-My; maëòalam-circle.

The Boundaries of the Circle of Mathurä Are Unknown

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     My circle of Mathura' is 20 yojanas (160 miles).

Text 139

tathä pädme yamunä-mähätmye 

ramyam apsarasäà sthänaà
     yasmimç caïcalatäà gataù
yäyävaraù purä vipras
     tapasvé vijitendriyaù

     tathä-as; pädme yamunä-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Yamuna-mahatmya; ramyam-charming; apsarasäm-of apsaras; sthänam-place; yasmin-where; caïcalatäm- gataù-went; yäyävaraù-Yäyävara; purä'before; vipraùvipra; tapasvé-austere; vijitendriyaù-controlling the senses.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Yamunä-mähatmya, it is said:
     One day an austere, sense-controlled brähmaëa named Yäyävara went to the beautiful place Apsaras-tértha.

Text 140

cira-kälaà prataptaà tam
     indra-çäpägninärditam
spåñöä väri-kanenenaà
     mocayitvä tu pätakät
vimänenärka-varëena
     präpayät taà surälayam

     cira-kälam-for a long time; prataptam-austerities; tam-this; indra-Indra's; çäpa-curse; agninä-by the fire; arditam-tormented; spåñöä-touched;û väri-kanena-by a drop of water; enam-this; mocayitvä-freeing; tu-indeed; pätakät-from sins; vimänena-by an airmplace; arka-varëena-splendid as the sun; präpayät-brought; tam-him; surälayam-to the abode of the demigods.

     Tormented by the fire of Indra's curse, he performed austerities for a long time, but it was only when he was touched by a single drop of water there that he at once became free from his sin and an airplane splendid as the sun took him to the home of the demigods.  

Text 141

püjyamänädareëärghyair
     vänaprasthair yathä-vidhi
mäthura-maëòalaà praptä
     tasmäd devarñi-sevitä

     püjyamäna-worshiped; adareëa-with respect; arghyair-with arghya; vänaprasthair-vy Vanaprasthas; yathä-vidhi'following the rules; mäthura-maëòalam-the circle of Mathurä; praptä-attained; tasmäd'from that; devarñi-by Närada; sevitä-served.

     Respectfully worshiped with arghya by the vänaprasthas and served by the sages, the Yamunä river flows through Mathura'-maëòala.

Text 142

pävayitvä kurün deçän
     çürasenän samäviçat
vanäni dvädaça sphéta-
     sphétäni guëa-sampadä

     pävayitvä-purifying; kurün-Kurus; deçän-lands; çürasenän-Surasenas; samäviçat-entered; vanäni-forests; dvädaça-12; sphéta-sphétäni-great; guëa-sampadä-rich with good qualities.

     After purifying the Kuru and Çürasena lands, it enters twelve great and glorious forests.

Text 143

kramäd viçräntim äsädya
     viçräntä keçavälaye
sudarçanopari-gatä
     gata-çrama-samépa-gä

     kramäd-gradually; viçräntim-Viçränti; äsädya-attaining; viçräntä keçavälaye-abode of Kåñëa; sudarçana-Sudarsana; upari-gatä-above; gata-çrama-samépa-gä-near Gataçrama.

     Gradually it reaches Viçränti-tértha in the abode of Lord Keçava. It goes to Sudarçana and then it flows by Viçräma-ghäöa.

Text 144

ity upakramya 

açliñöa vasudevena
     sat-kåtyäbhyarcya täpané
sampräptä puëya-salilä
     su-puëyaà dhrauvyam äçramam

     iti-thus; upakramya-following; açliñöa-embraced; vasudevena-by Kåñëa; sat-kåtya abhyarcya'respectfully worshiped; täpané-Ymauna; sampräptä-attained; puëya-salilä-pure waters; su-puëyam-sacred; dhrauvyam äçramam-Dhruva's äçrama.

     Lord Väsudeva respectfully worships and embraces the Yamunä, which with its pure waters flows to pure Dhruva-äçrama.

Text 145

sampräptä puëya-salilä
     su-puëyaà reëukäçramam
dékñito yatra rämo 'bhüt
     sarva-kñatra-kñayädhvare

     sampräptä-attained; puëya-salilä-pure water; su-puëyam-sacred; reëukäçramam-Renukasrama; dékñitaù-initiated; yatra-where; rämaù-Rama; abhüt-was; sarva-kñatra-kñayädhvare-in the sacrifice to kill all the kçatriyas.

     With its pure waters it flows to pure Reëuka'-äçrama, where Lord Räma was initiated to perform a yaj,sy 241a to kill all the kñatriyas.

Text 146

tataù prayätä yamunä
     bharatasyäçvamedhikam
iñöaà çäkuntaleyena
     säraìgair yatra saptabhiù

     tataù-then; prayätä-gone; yamunä-Yamuna; bharatasya-of Bharata; açvamedhikam-asvamedha; iñöam-done; çäkuntaleyena-the son of Sakuntalä; säraìgair-saranga-yajnas» yatra-where; saptabhiù-seven.

     Then the Yamuna' flows by the place where Bharata performed an äçvamedha-yajïa and the place where Çakuntalä's son performed seven säraìga-yajïas.

Text 147

atha sa saptabhir medhyaiù
     somapendro 'py amadyata
tataù pratyaìmukhi bhütvä
     sampräptä çaukaréà purém
yasyaà dharäà samuddhartuà
     utpannaç cädiçükaraù

     atha-now; sah-he; saptabhir medhyaiù-with seven sacrifices; somapendraù-Indraq; api-also; amadyata'was pleased; tataù-then; pratyäìmukhi bhütvä-turning west; sampräptä-attained; çaukarém- puré-Saukari Puri; yasyam-in which; dharäm-earth; samuddhartum- utpannaù-lifted; ca-and; adiçükaraù-Varäha.

     Indra was pleased when he drank soma at those seven yajïas. Then the river turns west and flows to Çaukaré Puré, where Lord Varäha lifted the earth.

Text 148

tatas taà nagarià çauré
     bhütvä pratyaìmukhi punaù
parikramya viniñkräntä
     jihma-gatyeva pannagé

     tataù-then; tam-that; nagarim-city; çauré bhütvä pratyaìmukhi punaù parikramya -continuing west;viniñkräntä-crooked; jihma-gatyä iva pannagé-like a snake.

     Continuing west, the river circles that city and then continues with crooked motions as a snake.

Text 149

tataù sa çürasenebhyaù
     païcalänäà vimukti-dä
iñöakäçramam äpede
     vaçiñöhäyatanaà mahat

     tataù-then; sa-it; çürasenebhyaù-from the land of Surasena; païcalänäm-to the people pof Pancala-desa; vimukti-liberation; dä-giving; iñöakäçramam-Istakasrama; äpede-attained; vaçiñöhäyatanam-the home of Vaçiñöa Muni; mahat-great.

     Then it leaves the land of Çurasena and gives liberation to the people of Päïcäla-deça, and then it flows to iñöaka-äçrama, the home of Vaçiñöa Muni.

Text 150

     etena yäyä-varam adhikåtya çaukaré-vaöeçvara-paryantaà mathurä-maëòalaà jïeyam. evam eva sarväsu dikñö api jïeyam. viàçati-yojanätmake bahu-térthavat tvayä viçeñaù.

     etena-thus; yäyä-varam-Yayavara; adhikåtya-in relation; çaukaré-vaöeçvara-paryantam-from Saukari to Vatesvara;  jïeyam-is known; evam-thus; eva-indeed; sarväsu dikñu-in all directions; api-also; jïeyam'known; viàçati-yojanätmake-20 yojanas; bahu-térthavat-like a great holy place; tvayä-by you; viçeña-specific. 

     In this way the circle of Mathura' goes from Yäyävara-äçrama to Çaukaré Puré to Vaçiñöha-äçrama. Turning to all directions, it makes a circle 20 yojanas (160 miles, in circumference. There are many holy places within that circle. 

Text 151

mathurä-khaëòe 

mathurä-maëòalaà tad dhi
     yojanänäà tu dvädaçe
yatra tértha-sahasräëi
     kåñëa-räma-kåtäni ca

     mathurä-khaëòe-in Mathura'-khaëòa; mathurä-maëòalam-the circle of Mathurä; tad-that; hi-indeed; yojanänäm-of yojanas; tu-indeed; dvädaçe-12; yatra-where; tértha-holy places; sahasräëi-thousands; kåñëa-räma-kåtäni-done by Kåñëa and Balaräma; ca-and.

     In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

     The circle of Mathura' is 12 yojanas (96 miles, in circumference. Within it are thousands of holy places where Lord Kåñëa and Lord Räma enjoyed pastimes.

Text 152

tathä hi vaiçiñöhyam 

gavyütir dvädaçamayé
     dvädaçäraëya-samyutä
taträpi mathurä devi
     sarva-siddhi-vidhäyiné

     tathä hi-furthermore; vaiçiñöhyam-specific; gavyütir-krosas; dvädaçamayé-12; dvädaça-12; araëya-forests; samyutä-endowed; tatra-there; api'also; mathurä-Mathurä; devi-O goddess; sarva-siddhi-vidhäyiné-granting all perfections.

A Specifé Description (in the Mathurä-khaëòa)

     Its measurement is 12 kroças (24 miles). It has twelve forests. O goddess, within it is Mathurä, which grants all perfections.

Text 153

taträpi padmäkåter vaiçiñöyam 

idaà padmaà mahä-bhäge
     sarveñäà mukti-däyakam
karëikäyäà sthito devi
     keçavaù kleça-näçanaù

     tatra-there; api-also; padma-of a lotus; äkåter-form; vaiçiñöyam-specific; idam-this; padmam-lotus; mahä-bhäge-O fortunate one; sarveñäm-to all; mukti-liberation; däyakam-giving; karëikäyäm-whorl; sthitaù-standing; devi-O goddess; keçavaù'Kåñëa; kleça-sufferings; näçanaù-destroying.

In the Same Scripture a Description of Mathura' as a Lotus Flower

     O beautiful girl, this place is a great lotus flower that gives liberation to all. O goddess, in the whorl of this lotus Lord Keçava, the destroyer of troubles, stays.

Text 154

karëikäyäà måtä ye tu
     te narä mukti-bhäginaù
madhya-paträ måtä ye ca
     teñäà muktir vasundhare

     karëikäyäm-in the whorl; måtäù-after death; ye-who; tu-indeed; te-they; naräù mukti-bhäginaù'liberated souls; madhya-paträ-in the middle leaf; måtäù-after death; ye-who; ca-and; teñäm-of them; muktir-liberation» vasundhare-O earth.

     They who die in the whorl of this lotus become liberated. O earth-goddess,they who die in the middle leaves of this lotus become liberated.

Text 155

paçcime tu harià devaà
     govardhana-niväsinäm
dåñövä taà deva-deveçaà
     kià manaù paritapyase

     paçcime-in the west; tu-indeed; harim- devam-the Deity of Lord Hari; govardhana-niväsinäm-residing on Govardhana Hill; dåñövä-having seen; tam- deva-deveçam-the master of the demigods; kim-what?; manaù-heart; paritapyase-suffers.

     What heart, seeing the Deity of Lord Hari, who resides on Govardhana Hill in the western part of this lotus, and who is the master of the demigods, will remain unhappy?

Text 156

uttareëa tu govindaà
     dåñövä devaà paraà çubham
näsau patati saàsäre
     yävad ähüta-samplavam

     uttareëa-in the north; tu-indeed; govindam-Lord Govinda; dåñövä-having seen; devam-Deity; param-transcendental; çubham-handsome; na-not; asau-he; patati-falls; saàsäre-into birth and death; yävad-as far as; ähüta-samplavam-an ocean.

     A person who sees the handsome Deity of Lord Govinda in the northern part of this lotus will not fall into the ocean of repeated birth and death.

Text 157

viçränti-samjïakaà térthaà
     pürva-patre vyavasthitam
yaà dåñövä tu naro yäti
     muktià nästy atra saàçayaù

     viçränti-Viçränti; samjïakam-named; tértham-holy place; pürva-eastern; patre-on the petal;û vyavasthitam-situated; yam-whom; dåñövä-having seen; tu-indeed; naraù-a person; yäti-attains; muktim-liberation; na-not; asti-is; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

     A person who sees Viçränti-tértha on the eastern petals of this lotus attains liberation. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 158

dakñiëenottamaà viddhi
     pratimäà divya-rüpiëém
mahä-käyäà su-rüpäà ca
     keçaväkära-sannibhäm
yaà dåñövä manujo devi
     brahmaloke mahéyate

     dakñiëena-in the south; uttamam-supreme; viddhi-know; pratimäm-Deity; divya-rüpiném-splendid; mahä-käyäm-large; su-rüpäm-handsome; ca-and; keçava-äkära-sannibhäm-Keçava; yam-whim; dåñövä-having seen; manujaù-a person; devi-O goddess; brahmaloke-on Brahmaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

     Know that in the south is a large, splendidly handsome Deity of Lord Keçava. O goddess, a person who sees this Deity becomes glorious in the spiritual world.

Text 159

athätra käla-viçeñe niväsa-phalam. ädi-värähe tatra jyaiñöhe
 
jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
     snätvä tu niyatendriyaù
mathuräyäà harià dåñövä
     präpnoti paramäà gatim

     atha-now; atra-here; käla-time; viçeñe-s[ecific; niväsa-of residence; phalam-result; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; jyaiñöhe-in the month of Jyaistha; jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on the çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; tu-indeed; niyata-controlling; indriyaù-the senses; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-the Deity of Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti-attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

The Result of Residing at Mathura' During Certain Specifé Times

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa the month of Jyaiñöha (May-June, is described:
     A person who is sense-controlled and who bathes in Mathura' during the çukla-dvädaçi in the month of Jyaiñöha attains the supreme destination.

Text 160

cäturmäsye. ädi-värähe påthivyäà yäni térthäni
     ä-samudra-saräàsi ca
mathuräyäà gamiñyanti
     supte caiva janärdane

     cäturmäsye-during Caturmasya; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; påthivyäm-on the earth; yäni-which; térthäni-holy places; ä-samudra-saräàsi-to the oceans and lakes; ca-and; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; gamiñyanti-will go; supte-asleep; ca-and; eva-certainly; janärdane-Kåñëa.

Residing in Mathura' During Caturmasya 

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     When Lord Janärdana will go to sleep all holy places, lakes, and seas on the earth will go to Mathurä.

     Note: Lord Kåñëa sleeps during the four months of Cäturmäsya.

Text 161

caturo varñikän mäsän
     madhu-puryä vasemahi
sarväni tatra térthäni
     vividhäni vasanti ca

     caturaù-four; varñikän-of the monsoon season; mäsän-months; madhu-puryä-of Mathurä; vasemahi-let us reside; sarväni-all; tatra-there; térthäni-holy places; vividhäni-various; vasanti-reside; ca-and.

     Let us reside in Mathura'-puré during the four months of the monsoon season, when all holy places also reside there.

Text 162

tatraiva janmäñöamyäm 

janmäñöami-dine präpte
     tatra yo mäà prapaçyati
janma-koöi-kåtaà päpaà
     tat-kñaëäd eva naçyati

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; janmäñöamyäm-on janmastami; janmäñöami-dine-when Janmastami day; präpte-has arrived; tatra-there; yaù-who; mam-Me;û prapaçyati-sees; janma-koöi-kåtam-done in millions of births; päpam-sin; tat-kñaëad-in that moment; eva'certainly; naçyati-perish.

Residing in Mathura' During Janmäñöamé

     In the same scripture Lord Kåñëa says:

     For a person who sees Me there (in Mathurä, during Janmäñöamé, the sins of millions of births perish in a single moment.

Text 163

bhädre mäsi mamäñöäbhyäà
     yaù karoti mamärcanam
sarvaà päpaà parityajya
     mama sthänaà sa gacchati

     bhädre mäsi-in the month of Bhadra; mama-My; añöäbhyäm-on janmastami; yaù-who; karoti-does; mama-My;rcanam-worship; sarvam-all; päpam-sin» parityajya-leaving; mama-My; sthänam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     A person who worships Me during My Janmäñöamé in the month of Bhädra becomes free from all sins and goes to My abode.

Texts 164 and 165

sarvaà taptaà tapas tena
     sarvaà dänaà ca taiù kåtam
yaiù kåtaà mathuräà gatvä
     bhadreñöamyäà vasundhare
snätvä viçränti-tértheñu
     püjanaà me 'valokanam

     sarvam-all; taptam-austerities; tapaù-performed; tena-by him; sarvam-all; dänam-charity; ca-and; taiù-by them; kåtam-done;û yaiù-by whom; kåtam-done; mathuräm-to Mathurä; gatvä-having gone; bhadreñöamyäm-on auspicious Janmastami; vasundhare'O earth; snätvä-having bathed; viçränti-tértheñu-at Viçränti-tértha; püjanam-worship; me-of Me» avalokanam-sight.

     All austerities are automatically performed and all charity automatically given by they who, going to Mathura' during Janmastami in the month of Bhadra, bathe in Viçränti-tértha, worship me, and see My Deity-form, O earth-goddess.

Text 166

viçeñataù kärttike. pädme kärttika-mähätmye närada-väkyam

yatra kuträpi deçe ca
     kärttike snäna-dänataù
agni-hotra-samaà puëyaà
     püjäyäà tu viçeñataù

     viçeñataù-specifically; kärttike-in karttika; pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; närada-of Narada; väkyam-words; yatra-where; kuträpi-in a certain; deçe-country; ca-and; kärttike-during Kärttika; snäna-from bathing; dänataù-and giving charity; agni-hotra-to an agnihotra sacrifice; samam-equal; puëyam-pious merit; püjäyäm-in worship; tu-indeed; viçeñataù-specifically.

Residing in Mathura' During the Month of Kärttika

     In the Kärttika-mähätmya, Närada says:

     By bathing in sacred places and giving charity during the month of Kärttika, a person in any country attains piety equal to an agnihotra-yajïa.     

Text 167

kurukñetre koöi-guëo
     gaìgäyäm api tat-samaù
tato 'dhikaù puñkare syäd
     dvärakäyäà tu bhärgava

     kurukñetre-in Kurukñetra; koöi-guëaù-millions of times; gaìgäyäm-in the Ganges; api-also; tat-samaù-equal to that; tataù-than that; adhikaù-greater; puñkare-in Puñkara; syäd-is; dvärakäyäm-in Dvärakä; tu-indeed; bhärgava-O Bhärgava.

     When these activities are performed at Kurukñetra or on the banks of the Ganges, the benefit is multiplied by millions of times. The benefit is even greater at Puñkara or Dvaraka, O Bhärgava.

Text 168

kåñëa-sälokya-do mäsaù
     püja-snänaiç ca kärttikaù
anyaù puryäs tat-samänä
     bhavanti mathuräà vinä

     kåñëa-sälokya-daù-giving residence on the same planet as Kåñëa; mäsaù-month; püja-with worship; snänaiù-bathing; ca-and; kärttikaù-Kärttika; anyaù'another; puryäù-of the city; tat-samänä-equal; bhavanti-are; mathuräm-Mathurä; vinä-without.

     In Mathura' bathing and worship during the month of Kärttika place one on the same planet as Lord Kåñëa. No other holy place is equal to Mathurä.

Text 169

dämodaratvaà hi hares
     tatraiväsit yataù kila
mathuräyäà tatas türjo
     vaikuëöha-préti-vardhanaù
kärttiko mathuräyäà vai
     paramävadhir iñyate

     dämodaratvam-the state of being Dämodara; hi-indeed; hareùof Lord Hari; tatra-there; eva-indeed; äsét-was; yataù-because; kila-indeed» mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tataù-then; tu-indeed; ürjaù-Kärttika; vaikuëöha-Lord Vaikuëöha; préti-pleasure; vardhanaù-increasing; kärttikaù-Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai'indeed; parama-avadhir-the supreme destination; iñyate-is accepted.

     The month of Kärttika, when Lord Hari enjoyed His Dämodara-pastime in Mathurä, delights Lord Vaikuëöha. The month of Kärttika spent in Mathura' brings the supreme destination.

Text 170

yathä mäghe prayägaù syäd
     vaiçäkhe jähnavé tathä
kärttike mathurä sevyä
     tatrotkarñaù paro na hi

     yathä-as; maghe-in Magha; prayägaù-Prayäga; syäd-is; vaiçäkhe-in vaisakha; jähnavé-the Ganges; tathä-so; kärttike-in karttika; mathurä-Mathurä; sevyä-to be served; tatra-there; utkarñaù-excellence; paraù-better; na-not; hi-indeed.

     As Prayäga should be served in the month of Mägha, and the Ganges in the month of Vaiçäkhä, so Mathura' should be served in the month of Kärttika. Nothing is better than that service.

Text 171

mathuräyäà narair ürje
     snätvä dämodaro 'rcitaùkåñëa-rüpa hi te jïeyä
     nätra käryä vicaraëä

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; narair-by people; ürje-in Kärttika; snätvä-having bathed; dämodaraù-Lord Dämodara; arcitaù-worshiped; kåñëa-rüpah-the form of Kåñëa; hi-indeed; te-they; jïeyäh-should be known; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicaraëä-doubt.

     They who, after properly bathing, worship Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika, attain forms like that of Lord Kåñëa. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 172

durlabhaù kärttiko viprä
     mathuräyäà nåëäm iha
yatrarcitaù svakaà rüpaà
     bhaktebhyaù samprayacchati

     durlabhaù-rare; kärttikaù-Kärttika; vipräh-O brähmaëas; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; nåëäm-of people; iha-here; yatra-where; arcitaù-worshiped; svakam-own; rüpam-form; bhaktebhyaù-to the devotees; samprayacchati-gives.

     O brähmaëas, residence in Mathura' during Kärttika is a rare attainment for humans. To they who worship Him there and then the Lord gives their original spiritual forms.

Text 173

bhuktià muktià harir dadyäd
     arcito 'nyatra sevinäm
bhaktim tu na dadäty eva
     yato vaçya-karé hareù

     bhuktim-sense gratification; muktim--liberation; harir-Kåñëa; dadyäd-gives; arcitaù-worshiped; anyatra-in another place; sevinäm-of the servants; bhaktim'devotional service; tu-indeed; na-not; dadäti-gives; eva-indeed; yataù-because; vaçya-karé-brought under the dominion; hareù-of Kåñëa.

     When He is worshiped in any other place, Lord Hari gives only liberation or sense-gratification to His servants. He does not give them pure devotional service, for that service brings Him under their dominion.

Text 174

sät öaïjasä harer bhaktir
     labhyate kärttike naraiù
mathuräyäà sakåd api
     çré-dämodara-sevanät

     sä-this; tu-indeed; aïjasä-easily; harer-to Kåñëa; bhaktir-devotion; labhyate-is attained; kärttike-in karttika; naraiù-by people; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåd-once; api-even; çré-dämodara-sevanät-from serving Lord Dämodara.

     By once serving Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika, the people can easily attain pure devotional service to Lord Hari.

Text 175

mantra-dravya-vihiëaà ca
     vidhi-hénaà ca püjanam
manyate kärttike devo
     mathuräyäà mad-arcanam

     mantra-mantras; dravya-offerings; vihiëam-without; ca-and; vidhi-proper rules; hénam-without; ca-and; püjanam-worship; manyate-is considered; kärttike-during Kärttika; devaù-the Lord; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mad-arcanam-worship of Me.

     They who, even without proper mantras and offerings, and without properly following the rules, worship Him in Mathura' during Kärttika, the Lord considers His true devotees.

Text 176

yasya päpasya yujyeta
     maraëäntä hi niñkåtiù
tac-chuddhy-artham idaà proktaà
     präyaçcittaà su-niçcitam
kärttike mathuräyäà vai
     çré-dämodara-püjanam

     yasya-of whom; päpasya-sin; yujyeta-engaged; maraëäntäh-to the time of death; hi-indeed; niñkåtiù'atonement; tä-chuddhy-artham-to purify; idam-this; proktam-is said; präyaçcittam-atonement; su-niçcitam-carefully considered; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; çré-dämodara-püjanam-worship of Lord Dämodara.

     The perfect atonement to purify the sins of a lifetime is: worship Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika.

Text 177

sulabhä mathurä loke
     pratyabdaà kärttikas tathä
tathäpi saàsarantéha
     narä müòhä bhavämbudhau

     sulabhä-easy to attain; mathurä-Mathurä; loke-in this world; pratyabdam-every year; kärttikaù-Kärttika» tathä-so; tathäpi-still; saàsaranti-go; iha-here; naräh-peple; müòhäh-bewildered; bhava-of repeated birth and death; ambudhau-in the ocean.

     Although Mathura' is easy to visit in this world, and although Kärttika comes every year, the fools still swim in the ocean of repeated birth and death. 

Text 178

kià yajïaiù kià tapobhir vä
     térthair anyaiç ca sevitaiù
kärttike mathuräyäà ced
     arcyate rädhikä-priyaù

     kim-what is the use?; yajïaiù-of sacrifices; kim-what is the use?; tapobhir-of austerities; vä-or; térthair-holy places; anyaiù-of other; ca-and; sevitaiù-served; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ced-if; arcyate-is worshiped; rädhikä-Rädhä's; priyaù-beloved.

     What is the use of yajïas? What is the use of austerities? What is the use of serving other holy places if Çrématé Rädhikä's beloved is worshiped in Mathura' during Kärttika?

Text 179

yäni sarväëi térthäni
     nadä nadyaù saräàsi ca
kärttike nivasanty atra
     mäthure sarva-maëòale

     yäni-which; sarväni-all; térthäni-holy place; nadäh-streams; nadyaù-rivers; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and; kärttike-in Kärttika; nivasanti-reside; atra-here; mäthure sarva-maëòale-in the circle4 of Mathurä.

     All holy places and all holy rivers, streams, and lakes reside in the circle of Mathura' during Kärttika.

Text 180

paropahäsam uddiçya
     kärttike hari-sevayä
mathuräyäà labhed bhaktià
     kià punaù çraddhayä naraù

     para-upahäsam uddiçya-as a joke; kärttike-in Kärttika; hari-sevayä-with service to Lord Hari; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; labhed-attain; bhaktim-devotion; kim-what?; punaù-again; çraddhayä-with faith; naraù-a person.

     They who as a joke serve Lord Hari during Kärttika in Mathura' will attain pure devotional service, what to speak of they who serve the Lord with faith and devotion.

Text 181

tatraiva dhümrakeçaà prati yama-väkyam 

tasmän nåpätmaja çreyaù
     paraà kiïcin na-not; vidyate
kärttike mathuräyäà ca
     çré-dämodara-püjanät

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; dhümrakeçam- prati-to Dhumrakeça; yama-väkyam-words of Yama; tasmät-from this;  nåpätmaja-O prince; çreyaù param-better; kiïcit-something; na-not; vidyate-is; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; çré-dämodara-of Lord Dämodara; püjanät-than worship.

     In the same scripture Yamaräja says to Dhumrakeça:

     Therefore, O prince, nothing is better than to serve Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika.

Text 182

na cätra saàçayaù karyaù
     éçitåtvaà idaà hareù
räjä hi kasyacid dhåtvä
     sarvasvaà cet prayacchati
parasmai kasya kas tatra
     niyantä syät prabhor yathä

     na-not; ca-and; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt; karyaù-to be done; éçitåtvam-power; idam-this; hareù-of Kåñëa; räjä-king; hi-indeed; kasyacid-of someone; dhåtva-holding; sarvasvam-everything; cet-if; prayacchati-gives; parasmai-to another; kasya-of whom?; kaù-who?; tatra-there; niyantä-controller; syät-is; prabhor-the Lord; yathä-as.

     Of this there is no doubt. This is the power of Lord Hari. He can take everything from one person and He can give everything to another. Who is a controller as powerful as Lord Hari?

Text 183

ayaà sarveçvaraù çrémän
     anyathä kartum éçvaraù
aty-alpaà bhuri kurute
     bahu tucchaà ca manyate

     ayam-He; sarveçvaraù-the Lord of all; çrémän-master of opulences; anyathä-otherwise; kartum-to do; éçvaraù-able; aty-alpam-tiny; bhuri-great; kurute-makes; bahu-great; tuccham-insignificant; ca-and; manyate-is considered.

     He is the supremely opulent controller of all. He has the power to change anything. He can make the very small great and He can make the great insignificant.

Text 184

taträpi prabodhinyäm ati-viçeñah. pädme kärttika-mähätmye.

tävad garjanti térthäni
     väjimedhädayo makhaù
mathuräyäà priyä viñëor
     yävan nayati bodhiné

     tatra-there; api-also; prabodhinyäm-on Prabodhini» ati-viçeñah-specificaly; pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; tävad-then; garjanti-thunders; térthäni-holy places; väjimedhädayaù-beginning with açvamedha sacrifices; makhaù-sacrifices; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; priyä-dear; viñëor-of Kåñëa; yävan-when; nayati-leads; bodhiné-awakening.     

Residence in Mathura' During Prabodhini tithi

     In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

     When Lord Viñëu does not wake from His happy sleep on Prabodhiné tithi, then all the holy places roar with açvamedha-yajïas.     

     Note: Prabodhiné tithi is the first ekädaçé in the month of Kärttika. On that day the Lord awakens from His four-month-long nap.

Text 185

saàsära-dava-taptänäà
     käma-saukhya-pipäsinäm
çré-kåñëa-päda-padmasya
     sännidhyaà çétalaà gåham

     saàsära-of birth and death; dava-by the forest fire; taptänäm-burned; käma-of lust; saukhya-the pleasures; pipäsinäm-thirsty; çré-kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; päda-padmasya-of the lotus feet; sännidhyam-nearness; çétalam-cool; gåham-home.

     Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet are a cooling shelter for they who thirst after material happiness but find themselves burned by the forest-fire of repeated birth and death.

Text 186

mathuräyäà tu kià väcyaà
     jägare hari-sannidhau
kärttike bodhinéà präpya
     tataù çreyaù paraà hi na

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; kim-what?; väcyam-can be said; jägare-in the awakening; hari-sannidhau-near Lord Hari; kärttike-in Kärttika; bodhiném-Prabodhini; präpya-attaining; tataù-than that; çreyaù param-better» hi-indeed; na-not.

     What can be said about approaching the Deity of Lord Hari when He awakens in Mathurä? No day is better than the Prabodhiné day in the month of Kärttika.

Text 187

räjyam anyatra santyajya
     sphétaà nihata-kaëöakam
kärttike mathuräyäà vai
     kaimutyaà jägaraà caret

     räjyam-kingdom; anyatra-in another place; santyajya-abandoning; sphétam-great; nihata-kaëöakam-without disturbance; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; kaimutyam-what is better?; jägaram-awake; caret-may do.

     One should leave any other great and peaceful kingdom, and in Mathura' stay awake through the night during Prabodhini in the month of Kärttika. What place is better than Mathura' for this?

Text 188

atha dvädaçyäm. viñëu-puräëe 

ürjasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
     snätvä vai yamunä-jale
mathuräyäà harià dåñövä
     präpnoti paramäà gatim

     atha-now; dvädaçyäm-during dvädaçé; viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; ürjasya-of karttika; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; vai-indeed; yamunä-jale-in the water of the Yamunä; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti-attains; paramäm-supreme; gatim-destination.

Residing in Mathura' During Dvädaçé

     In the Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

     A person who during the Çukla-dvädaçé in the month of Kärttika bathes in the Yamunä and sees the Deity of Lord Hari in Mathura' attains the supreme destination.

Text 189

atha bhéñma-païcake. padme bhéñmaà prati çré-kåñëa-vacanam

tvayä kåte vrate päçcät
     khyäsyate bhéñma-païcakam
ye tatra janma-bhümau me
     kariñyanti mahä-vratam
mathuräyäà tu gäìgeya
     teñäà bhaktiù kare sthitä

     atha-now; bhéñma-païcake-in Bhisma-pancaka; padme-in the Padma Puräëa; bhéñmam- prati-to Bhisma; çré-kåñëa-vacanam-Kåñëa's words; tvayä-by you; kåte-done; vrate-vow; päçcät-after; khyäsyate-will be known; bhéñma-païcakam-as Bhisma-pancaka; ye-who; tatra-there; janma-bhümau'in the birthplace; me-My; kariñyanti-will do; mahä-vratam-great vow; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; gäìgeya-O Bhisma; teñäm-of them; bhaktiù-devotion; kare-in the hand; sthitä-standing.

Residing in Mathura' During Bhéñma-païcaka

     In the Padma Puräëa, Çri Kåñëa says to Bhéñma:

     O Gäìgeya, this vow you have followed will henceforth be known as Bhéñma-païcaka. They who follow this great vow in My birthplace, Mathurä, find pure devotional service resting in their hand.     

Text 190

särvabhaumas tö indra-padaà
     brahmalokas tathäkñayam
yoga-siddhià ca muktià ca
     préto yacchämi sarvaçaù

     särvabhaumaùroyal power; tu-indeed; indra-padam-the post of Indra; brahmalokaù-Brahmaloka; tathä-so; akñayam-immortal; yoga-siddhim-mysté power; ca-and; muktim-liberation; ca-and; prétaù-pleased; yacchämi-I give; sarvaçaù-completely.

     Being perfectly pleased with him, I give him royal power, the post of Indra, residence in immortal Brahmaloka, yogé powers, and liberation.

Text 191

durlabho bhakti-yogo me
     mama vaçya-vidhäyakaù
kärttike mathuräyäà ca
     vratenänena labhyate

     durlabhaù-difficult to attain; bhakti-yogaù-bhakti-yoga; me-of Me; mama-My; vaçya-vidhäyakaù-brings under the dominion; kärttike-in karttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; vratena-vow; anena-by this; labhyate-is attained.

     Pure devotional service to Me which, becausae it places Me under My devotee's dominion, is very difficult to attain, is easily attained by following this vow in Mathura' during Kärttika.

Text 192

puräëäntare ca

sarväbhiñöa-pradaà proktaà
     mäthure bhéñma-païcakam

     puräëa-antare-in another Puräëa; ca-and; sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires; pradam-granting; proktam-said; mäthure-in Mathurä; bhéñma-païcakam-Bhisma-pancaka.

     In another place in the Puräëas it is said:

     Following the vow of Bhéñma-païcaka in Mathura' is said to fulfill all desires.

Text 193

yathä bhaviñye 
bhéñma-païca-dine präpte
     mathurä-maëòale hareù
nidrä-ccheda-kare puëye
     päduke cävalokayet

     yathä-as; bhaviñye-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa; bhéñma-païca-dine präpte-on the day of Bhisma-pancaka; mathurä-maëòale-in Mathurä; hareù-of Kåñëa; nidrä-ccheda-kare-awakening from sleep; puëye-sacred; päduke-sandals; ca-and; avalokayet-may see.

     In the Bhaviñya Puräëa it is said:

     A person who observes Bhiñma-païcaka and Prabodhiné tithi in Mathura' will see Lord Hari's splendid sandals.

Text 194

atha mathurä-vanäntargata-madhupuré-mähätmyam. skände mathurä-khaëòe

madhor vanaà prathamato
     yatra vai mathurä-puré
madhu-daityo hato yatra
     hariëä viçva-mürtiëä

     atha-now; mathurä-vana-Mathura' Forest; antargata-within; madhupuré-Mathura' City; mähätmyam-glorification; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathurä-khaëòe'Mathurä-khaëòa; madhor vanam-Madhuvana; prathamataù-first; yatra-where; vai-indeed; mathurä-puré-Mathura' City; madhu-daityaù-the demon Madhu; hataù-killed; yatra-where; hariëä-by Lord Kåñëa; viçva-mürtiëä-the form of the universe.

Glorification of Mathurä City in Mathura' Forest

     In the Skända Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     First is Madhuvana, where is Mathura' City, where Lord Hari, who appears as the Universal Form, killed the Madhu demon.

Text 195

tatraiva bhagavad-väsa
     ävirbhävo harer nåpa
viçramaç ca hares tatra-there;
     devänäà ca nåpottama

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhagavad-of the Lord; väse-in the residence; ävirbhävaù-appearance; harer-of Lord Kåñëa; nåpa-O king» viçramaù-pastimes; ca-and; hareù-of Lord Hari; tatra-there; devänäm-of the demigods; ca-and; nåpottama-O great king.

     There the Supreme Personality of Godhead resides. O king, there Lord Hari appeared. O great king, there Lord Hari and the demigods enjoyed pastimes.

Text 196

yo vai madhuvane snäti
     yamunä-jalaà açrétaù
sarva-tértheñu sa snätas
     tat-phalaà labhate dhruvam

     yaù-who; vai-indeed; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; snäti-bathes; yamunä-jalam-in the Yamunä's waters; açrétaù'sheltered; sarva-tértheñu-in all holy places; sah-he; snätaùhas bathed; tat-phalam-result; labhate'attains; dhruvam-indeed.

     A person who bathes in the waters of the Yamuna in Madhuvana attains the result of bathing in all holy places.

Text 197

sarveñäà nåpa siddhiù syät
     tasmin madhuvane nåëäm
tapasä bhakti-yogena
     snäna-mätreëa karmaëä

     sarveñäm-of al; nåpa-O king; siddhiù-perfection; syät-is; tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; nåëäm-of people; tapasä-with austerity; bhakti-yogena-bhakti-yoga; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; karmaëä-by the activity.

     O king, a person who performs the devotional austerity of merely bathing in Madhuvana attains all perfections.

Text 198

aho madhuvanaà dhanyaà
     yatra rämaù sahänujaù
karoti karma lokänäà
     hitäya ca manéñinäm

     ahaù-Oh; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; dhanyam-opulent; yatra-where; rämaù-Balaräma; saha-with; anujaù-His younger brother; karoti-does; karma-action; lokänäm-of the worlds; hitäya-for the benefit; ca-and; manéñinäm-thoughtful.

     Madhuvana, where Balaräma and His younger brother performed actions for the benefit of thoughtful men, . . .

Text 199

mardito yatra kåñëena
     cograsenätmajo 'suraù
pävitaù sparça-mätreëa
     gatià nétaç ca yoginäm

     marditaù-killed; yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; ca-and; ugrasena-Ugrasena's; ätmajaù-son;û asuraù-demon; pävitaù-purified; sparça-mätreëa-simply by a touch; gatim-destination; nétaù-brought; ca-and; yoginäm-of the yogis.

 . . .and where Kåñëa killed Ugrasena's demon son, purified him with a mere touch, and gave him the desination attained by the yogés, is filled with transcendental opulence.

Text 200

tasmin madhuvane räjan
     durghataà kià hari-priye
vaktuà nämäni térthänäà
     çakyante na mayädhunä
tasmin madhuvane yäni
     mähätmyaà ca nåpottama

     tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; räjan-O king; durghatam-difficult to attain; kim-what?; hari-priye'dear to Lord Hari; vaktum-to say; nämäni-names; térthänäm-holy places; çakyante-are able; na-not; mayä-by me; adhunä-now; tasmin-in this; madhuvane-Madhuvana; yäni-which; mähätmyam-glorification;- ca-and; nåpottama-O great king.

     O king, what is difficult to attain in Madhuvana, which is so dear to Lord Hari? O great king, I do not now have the power to name Madhuvana's forests and describe their glories.

Text 201

aho madhuvanaà dåñöaà
     çrutaà vä tat su-sevinäm
sthitaà vä yaiù suraöitaà
     dhanyäs te bhuvi mänaväù

     ahaù-Oh; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; dåñöam-seen; çrutam-heard; vä-or; tat-that; su-sevinäm-of the servants; sthitam-situation; vä-or; yaiù-by whom; suraöitam-glorified; dhanyäù-fortunate; te-they; bhuvi-on the earth; mänaväù-people.

     They who see, hear about, serve, reside in, and glorify Madhuvana, are fortunate in this world.

Text 202

evaà pradakñiëaà kåtvä
     navaméà çukla-kaumudém
sarvän kulän samädäya
     viñëuloke mahéyate

     evam-in this way; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; kåtvä-doing; navamém-the ninth day; çukla-kaumudém-the âright moon; sarvän-all; kulän-relatives; samädäya-taking; viñëuloke-on Viñëuloka; mahéyate-glorified.

     A person who circumambulates Madhuvana on the ninth day of the bright moon during Kärttika, is glorified in Viñëuloka with all his relatives.

Text 203

kramataù pada-vinyäsä
     yävantaù sarvato diçaù
tävantaù kula-sambhütaù
     svarge tiñöhänti çäçvataù

     kramataù-gradually; pada-vinyäsä-placing his steps; yävantaù-as; sarvataù-in all; diçaù-directions; tävantaù-so; kula-sambhütaù-with his family; svarge-in the spiritual world; tiñöhänti-stays; çäçvataù-eternally.

     When a person wanders in Madhuvana, placing his steps in every direction, he finds himself eternally residing in the spiritual world with his family.

Text 204

anya-deça-gato dürät
     parikramati yo naraù
tasya sandarçanäd eva
     pütäù syur gata-kalmañäù

     anya-another; deça-country; gataù-gone; dürät-from far away; parikramati-circumambulates; yaù-who; naraù-a person; tasya-of him; sandarçanäd'from the sight; eva-indeed; pütäù-purified; syur-become; gata-gone; kalmañäù-sins.

     The sight of a person who comes from another country far away and circumambulates Mathurä, purifies the people and chases away their sins.

Text 205

çruto yais tu vidüra-sthaiù
     kåta-yatro naro naraiù
sarva-päpa-vinirmuktäs
     te 'pi yänti paräà gatim

     çrutaù-heard; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; vidüra-sthaiù-far away; kåta-yätraù-journeyed; naraù-a person; naraiù'with people; sarva-all; päpa-sins; vinirmuktäùfreed; te-they; api-also; yänti-attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.

     They who hear about others who come from far away to visit Madhuvana become free from all sins and go to the supreme destination.

Text 206

mathuräyäà naro gatvä
     dåñövä devaà svayambhuvam
pradakñiëäyäà yat puëyaà
     tat puëyaà labhate hi saù

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; naraù-a person; gatvä-having gone; dåñövä-having seen; devam-Lord; svayambhuvam-Svayambü; pradakñiëäyäm-in circumambulating; yat puëyam-what piety; tat puëyam-that piety; labhate-attains; hi-indeed; saù-he.

     A person who goes to Mathura' and sees the Deity of Lord Svayambhü attains the piety of circumambulating Madhuvana.

Text 207

atha janma-sthäna-mähätmyam. skände 

japopaväsa-nirato
     mathuräyäà ñaòänana
janma-sthänaà samäsädya
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     atha-now; janma-birth; sthäna-place; mähätmyam-glorification; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; japa-japa; upaväsa-and fasting; nirataù-engaged; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ñaòänana-O Karttikeya; janma-sthänam-birthplace; samäsädya-attaining; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyate-freed.

The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace

     In the Skända Puräëa it is said:
     O Kärttikeya, a person who fasts and chants japa at the Lord's birthplace becomes free from all sins.

Text 208

atha kärttike. pädme 

kärttike janma-sadane
     keçavasya ca ye naräù
sakåt praviñöäù çré-kåñëaà 
     te yänti param avyayam

     atha-now; kärttike-during Kärttika; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; kärttike-in Kärttika; janma-sadane-at the birth-chamber; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; ca-and; ye-who; naräù-pewrsons; sakåt-once; praviñöäù-entered; çré-kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; te-they; yänti-attain; param avyayam-eternal abode.

The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace During the Month of Kärttika

     In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

     They who once enter Lord Keçava's birth-chamber during the month of Kärttika go to eternal Lord Kåñëa.

Text 209

tatraiva prabodhanyäm 

ekaivaikädaçé kåñëa-
     janma-gehe kåtä naraiù
tato 'dhikaà prakartavyaà
     loke kiïcin na vidyate

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; prabodhanyäm-on Prabodhini; eka-one; eva-indeed; ekädaçé-ekädaçé; kåñëa-janma-gehe-Kåñëa's birth-chamber; kåtä-done; naraiù-by people; tataù-than that; adhikam-greater; prakartavyam-to be done; loke-in the world; kiïcit-something; na-not; vidyate-is.

The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace During the Prabodhiné Day Are Described in the Same Scripture: 

     In this world nothing is better than to observe Pabodhiné in Lord Kåñëa's birth-chamber.

Text 210

rätrau jägaraëaà taträ     prétyä kurvanti ye naräù
saàsära-moha-sväpnänte
     sadä jägrati jägrati

     rätrau-at night; jägaraëam-staying awake; tatra-there; prétyä-with happiness; kurvanti-do; ye-who; naräù-people; saàsära-moha-sväpnänte-at the end of the bewildering sleep of repeated birth and death; sadä'always; jägrati jägrati-awaken.

     They who happily remain awake during that night awaken from the bewildering sleep of repeated birth and death.

Text 211

anyaträpi priyä viñëor
     jägare syät prabodhiné
kià punar mathuräyäà sä
     tato vai janma-sadmani

     anyatra-in another place; api-also; priyä-dear; viñëor-to Kåñëa; jägare-staying awake; syät-is; prabodhiné-Prabodhini; kim-how much?; punar-more; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sä-that; tataù-therefore; vai'indeed; janma-sadmani-birth-chamber.

     Staying awake in any place during Prabodhiné pleases Lord Viñëu, what to speak of staying awake in Lord Kåñëa's birth chamber in Mathurä.

Text 212

atha çré-keçavasya mähätmyam. ädi-värähe 

pradakñiëé-kåtä tena
     sapta-dvépä vasundharä
pradakñini-kåto yena
     mathuräyäà tu keçavaù

     atha-now; çré-keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; mähätmyam-glorification;. ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; pradakñiëé-kåtä-circumambulated; tena-by him; sapta-dvépä-seven continents; vasundharä-earth; pradakñini-kåtaù-circumambulated; yena-by whom; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; keçavaù-Keçava.

The Glories of the Deity of Çré Keçava

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     A person who circumambulates the Deity of Çré Keçava in Mathura' circumambulates the the seven continents of the earth.

Text 213

iha janma-kåtaà päpam
     anya-janma-kåtaà ca yat
tat sarvaà naçyate çéghraà
     kértane keçavasya ca

     iha-here; janma-in this birth; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; anya-in another; janma-birth; kåtam-done; ca-and; yat-what; tat-that; sarvam-all; naçyate-perishes; çéghram-quickly; kértane-in the glorification; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; ca-and.

     Sins performed in this birth and other births are at once destroyed when one glorifies the Deity of Lord Keçava.

Text 214

tatraiva suptotthita-keçavasya darçana-phalam 

suptotthitaà harià dåñövä
     mathuräyäà vasundhare
na tasya punar ävåttir
     jäyate sa catur-bhujaù

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; supta-utthita-risen from sleep; keçavasya-of Keçava; darçana-sight; phalam'result; supta-utthitam-risen from sleep; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vasundhare-O earth; na-not; tasya-of him; punar-again; ävåttir-return; jäyate-is born; sah-he; catur-bhujaù-four-armed;

In the Same Scripture the Result of Seeing Lord Keçava Awaken From Sleep Is Described

     O earth-goddess, a person who sees Lord Keçava awaken from sleep in Mathura' does not take birth again in this world. He is born again as a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

Text 215

pädme kärttika-mähätmye 

suptam utthäpya govindaà
     tan mukhaà sütikä-gåhe
paçyanti kåta-puëyä ye
     teñäà kià bhägyam ucyate

     pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; suptam-sleep; utthäpya-awakening; govindam-Govinda; tat-that; mukham-face; sütikä-gåhe-in the birth-chamber; paçyanti-see; kåta-puëyä-piety; ye-who; teñäm-of them; kim-how?; bhägyam-good fortune; ucyate-is said.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

     How can the good fortune of the pious persons who see Lord Govinda awaken from sleep in His birth-chamber be described?

Text 216

viñëu-puräëe ñañöhe 'mçe 

ürjasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
     snätvä vai yamunä-jale
mathuräyäà harià dåñövä
     präpnoti paramäà gatim

     viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; sasthe aàçe-in the Sixth Canto; ürjasya-of Kärttika; çukla-dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; vai-indeed; yamunä-jale-in the Yamunä's water; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti'attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

     In the Viñëu Puräëa, Canto Six, it is said:

     A person who on the çukla-dvädaçé of Kärttika bathes in the Yamunä's waters and then sees the Deity of Lord Hari in Mathurä, attains the supreme destination.

Text 217

atha çré-bhagavan-mürténäà mähätmyam. ädi-värähe 

dérgha-viñëuà samälokya
     padmanäbhaà svayambhuvam
mathuräyäà sakåd devi
     sarväbhéñöam aväpnuyät

     atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; mürténäm-of the Deities; mähätmyam-glorification; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; dérgha-viñëum-Dérgha Viñëu; samälokya-seeing; padmanäbham-Padmanäbha; svayambhuvam-Svayambhü; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåd'once; devi-O goddess; sarva-all; abhiñöam-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

Glorification of the Deity Forms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O goddess, a person who once sees the Deities of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu, Lord Padmanäbha, and Lord Svayambhü, in Mathurä, attains all his desires.

Text 218

tathä 

viçränti-saàjïakaà dåñövä
     dérgha-viñëuà ca keçavam
sarveñäà darçanät puëyam
     ebhir dåñöaiù phalaà labhet

     tathä-so; viçränti-saàjïakam-named Viçränti; dåñövä-having seen; dérgha-viñëum-Dirgha Vis„ëu; ca-and; keçavam-Keçava; sarveñäm-of all; darçanät-from the sight; puëyam-piety; ebhir-by them; dåñöaiù-seen; phalam-result; labhet-attains.

     It is also said:

     They who see the Deities of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu and Lord Keçava at Viçränti-tértha attain the pious result of seeing all other Deities.

Text 219

udaye mämakaà tejaù
     sadä viçränti-saàjïake
madhyähne mämakaà tejo
     dérgha-viñëau vyavasthitam
keçave mämakaà tejo
     dina-bhäge caturthake

     udaye-at sunrise; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; sadä-always; viçränti-saàjïake-at Viçränti; madhyähne'at midday; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; dérgha-viñëau-in Dérgha Viñëu; vyavasthitam-placed; keçave-in Keçava; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; dina-bhäge caturthake-at the fourth portion of the day.

     At sunrise My splendor rests in Viçränti-tértha. At midday My splendor rests in the Deity of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu. In the evening My splendor rests in the Deity of Lord Keçava.

Text 220

atha çré-kåñëa-pariväräëäm 

ekänaàçäà tato devéà
     yaçodäà devakéà tadä
mahä-vidyeçvaréà dåñövä
     mucyate brahma-hatyayä

     atha-now; çré-kåñëa-pariväräëäm-of Lord Kåñëa's associates; ekänaàçäm-Ekanamsa-devi; tato-then; devém-devi; yaçodäm-Yaçodä; devakém-Devaké; tadä-then; mahä-vidyeçvarém-Maha'-Vidyeçvaré; dåñövä-having seen; mucyate-becomes free; brahma-hatyayä-from the sin opf killing a Brahmana.

The Glorification of Çré Kåñëa's Associates

     A person who sees Ekänaàça'-devé, Yaçodä, Devaké, or Maha'-Vidyeçvaré-devé, becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 221

atha bhüteçvarasya 

mathuräyäà ca deva tvaà
     kñetra-palo bhaviñyasi
tvayi dåñöe mahä-deva
     mama kñetra-phalaà labhet

     atha-now; bhüteçvarasya-of Lord Bhüteçvara; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; deva-O Lord; tvam-you; kñetra-of the place; pälaù-protector; bhaviñyasi-are; tvayi-in you; dåñöe-seen; mahä-deva'O Mahädeva; mama-My; kñetra-of the place;phalam-result; labhet-attains.

The Glorification of the Deity Lord Bhüteçvara (Çiva)

     O Deva, you will be the protector of Mathurä. O Mahädeva, a person who sees you will attain the result of seeing My own abode.

Text 222

nirväëa-khaëòe 

yatra bhüteçvaro devo
     mokñadaù päpinäm api
mama priyatamo nityaà
     deva bhüteçvaraù paraù

     nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvän„-khaëòa; yatra-where; bhüteçvaraù-Bhutesvara; devaù-Lord; mokñadaù-giver of liberation; päpinäm-of the sinful; api-even; mama-My; priyatamaù-most dear; nityam-always; deva'O deva; bhüteçvaraù-Bhutesvara; paraù-supreme.

     In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:

     In Mathura' is the deity Lord Bhuteçvara, who grants liberation to even the sinful. This Bhuteçvara deity is very dear to Me.

Text 223

kathaà vä mayi bhaktià sa
     labhate päpa-püruñaù
yo madéyaà paraà bhaktaà
     çivaà sampüjayen na hi

     katham-how?; vä-or; mayi-for me; bhaktim-devotion; sah-he; labhate-attains; päpa-püruñaù'sinful person; yaù-who; madéyam-My; param- bhaktam-supreme devotion; çivam-Çiva; sampüjayet'may worship; na-not; hi-indeed.

     How can a sinful person who tries to worship Me but will not worship Bhüteçvara Çiva attain devotion to Me?

Text 224

man-mäyä-mohita-dhiyaù
     präyas te mänavädhamäù
bhüteçvaraà na smaranti
     na namanti stuvanti vä

     mat-My; mäyä-Maya; mohita-bewildered; dhiyaù-intelligence; präyaù-mostly; te-they; mänavädhamäù-the lowest of men; bhüteçvaram-Bhutesvara; na-not; smaranti-remember; na-not; namanti-offer obeisances; stuvanti-offer prayers; vä-or.

     The lowest of men, who are bewildered by My mäyä, will not meditate on, bow down before, and offer prayers to Lord Bhüteçvara.

Text 225

atha viçränti-mähätmyam. skände 

tatra térthaà mahäräja
     viçränti-loka-viçrutam
bhramitvä sarva-térthäni
     viçräntià yänti sattvatäù

     atha-now; viçränti-of Viçränti; mähätmyam-glorification;. skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; tértham-holy place; mahäräja-O king; viçränti-Viçränti; loka-in the world; viçrutam-famous; bhramitvä-having wandered; sarva-térthäni-to all holy places; viçräntim-to Viçränti-tértha; yänti-attain; sattvatäù-the devotees.

The Glorification of Viçränti-tértha

     In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

     O great king, this holy place is famous in the world as Viçränti-tértha. After traveling to all holy places, the saintly devotees rest in Viçränti-tértha.

Text 226

tatraiva badaré-mähätmye 

viçränti-térthe vidhivat
     snätvä kåtvä tilodakam
pitån uddhåtya narakäd
     viñëulokaà prapadyate

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; badaré-of badari-tértha; mähätmye-in the glorification; viçränti-térthe-in Viçränti-tértha; vidhivat-following the rules; snätvä-having bathed; kåtvä-having done; tila-sesame; udakam-and water; pitån-to the pitäs; uddhåtya-lifting; narakäd-from hell; viñëulokam-Viñëuloks; prapadyate-atain.

     In the same scripture, in the Badaré-mähätmya, it is said:

     A person who, following the rules of the scriptures, bathes at Viçränti-tértha and makes an offering of sesame seeds and water, lifts his ancestors from hell and makes them enter Viñëuloka.

Text 227

yadi kuryät pramädena
     pätakaà tatra mänaväù
viçränti-snäna-mätreëa
     bhasmé-bhavati tat-kñaëät

     yadi-if; kuryät-does; pramädena-out of foolishness; pätakam-sin; tatra-there; mänaväù-people; viçränti-at Viçränti-tértha; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; bhasmé-bhavati-becomes ashes; tat-kñaëät-at that moment.

     If a person foolishly commits a sin, by his simply bathing at Viçränti-tértha the sin will be at once burned to ashes.

Text 228

saura-puräëe 

*tato viçränti-térthäkhyaà
     tértham aìgho-vinäçanam
saàsära-maru-saïcära-
     kleça-viçränti-daà nåëäm

     saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; viçränti-térthäkhyam-Viçränti-tértha; tértham-holy place; aìghaù-sins; vinäçanam-destruction; saàsära-of birth and death; maru-in the desert; saïcära-wandering; kleça-suffering; viçränti-dam-giving rest; nåëäm-to people.

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     The holy place named Viçränti-tértha destroys sins and gives rest from the pain of wandering in the desert of birth and death.

Text 229

tatra térthe kåta-snäno
     yo 'rcayed acyutaà naram
sa mukto bhava-santäpäd
     amåtatväya kalpate

     tatra-there; térthe-in the holy place; kåta-snänaù-bathed; yaù-one who; arcayed-worships; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; naram-person; sah-he; muktaù-liberated; bhava-santäpäd-from the sufferings of material existence; amåtatväya'for immortality; kalpate-becomes qualified.

     A person who, bathing at this holy place, worships Lord Acyuta, becomes free from the sufferings of repeated birth and death and qualified for liberation.

Text 230

pädme yamunä-mähätmye 

kalinda-parvatodbhede
     mathuräyäà tathä puré
pratyaì-mukhyaà ca çaukaryäà
     bhägérathyäç ca saìgame

     pädme yamunä-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Yamuna'-mahatmya; kalinda-parvata-udbhede-from Mount Kalinda; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tathä-so; puré-the city; pratyan--mukhyam-turning; ca-and; çaukaryäm-to varäha-tértha; bhägérathyäù-with the Ganges; ca-and; saìgame-in meeting.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Yamunä-mähätmya, it is said:

     Flowing from Mount Kalinda to Mathura' City, and then west to Ädi-varäha-tértha, the Yamuna' eventually meets the Ganges.

Text 231

phalaà uttara-küloktaà
     tat-kälindyäà çatädhikamtad eva koöi-guëitaà
     viçräntau kathyate budhaiù

     phalam-result; uttara-küla-northern shore; uktam-said; tat-kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; çata-adhikam-a hundred times greater; tad-that; eva-indeed; koöi-guëitam-millions of times more; viçräntau-at Viçränti; kathyate-is said; budhaiù-by the wise.

     The wise say the pious result of bathing in the Yamuna' is a hundred times greater on its northern shore and millions of times greater at Viçränti-tértha.

Text 232

ädi-värähe 

viçränti-saàjïakaà näma
     térthaà trailokya-durlabham
yasmin snäto naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viçränti-saàjïakam- näma tértham-Viçränti-tértha; trailokya-in the three worlds; durlabham-rare; yasmin-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O goddess, a person who bathes in the holy place named Viçränti-tértha, which is difficult to attain in the three worlds, is glorified in My own abode.

Text 233

gaìgä-çata-guëaà proktaà
     yatra keçi-nipätitaù
keçyäù çata-guëaà proktaà
     yatra viçräntito hariù

     gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëam-multiplied 100 times; proktam- yatra-where; keçi-Keçé; nipätitaù-died; keçyäù-than Kesi-tértha; çata-guëam-a hundred times more; proktam-said; yatra-where; viçräntitaù-rested; hariù-Kåñëa.

     The place where Keçé was killed is said to be a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. The place where Lord Hari rested is said to be a hundred times more sacred than Keçi-tértha.

Text 234

tathä 

ardha-candräd viçeño 'sti
     térthe viçränti-saàjïake
dähädi-karaëe tatra
     gardhabho 'pi catur-bhüjaù

     tathä-so; ardha-candräd-from Ardhacandra-tértha; viçeñaù-specific; asti-is; térthe viçränti-saàjïake-in Viçränti-tértha; daha-ädi-beginning with a forest-fire; karaëe-cause; tatra-there; gardhabhaù-an ass; api-even; catur-bhüjaù-four arms.

     It is also said:

     Near Ardhacandra-tértha is Viçränti-tértha, where there was a forest-fire and where an ass-demon became a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

Text 235

väsudevo vasen nityaà
     tasmin sthäne nåpottama
viçräntià kurute yena
     tena viçränti-saàjïakam

     väsudevaù-Lord Väsudeva; vaset-lives; nityam-eternaly; tasmin sthäne-in that place; nåpottama'O great king; viçräntim-rest; kurute-does; yena-by whom; tena-by Him; viçränti-saàjïakam-named Viçränti-tértha.

     O king, Lord Väsudeva resides eternally in this place. He rested (viçram, here and therefore this place is named Viçränti-tértha.

Text 236

puräëäntare 'pi 

kalpa-koöi-çatenäpi
     viçräntau roma-romasu
kñaura-karmaëi dähe ca
     punar-janma na vidyate

     puräëa-antare-in another Puräëa; api-also; kalpa-koöi-çatena-hundreds of millions of kalpas; api-even; viçräntau-in Viçränti; roma-romasu-in the hair; kñaura-karmaëi-shaving; dähe-in a fire; ca-and; punar-janma-birth again; na-not; vidyate-is.

     In another Puräëa it is said:
     Shaving one's head at Viçränti-tértha is a great fire in which hundreds of millions of kalpas of future births perish.

Text 237

atha gataçramadeva-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe 

sarva-tértheñu yat snänaà
     sarva-tértheñu yat phalam
tat phalaà labhate devi
     dåñövä devaà gataçramam

     atha-now; gataçramadeva-of Lord Gataçrama; mähätmyam-glorification; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; sarva-all; tértheñu-in holy places; yat-what; snänam-bath; sarva-tértheñu-in all holy places; yat-what; phalam-result; tat-that; phalam-result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; dåñövä-having seen; devam- gataçramam-Lord Gataçrama.

The Glorification of Gataçramadeva

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O goddess, the pious result of bathing at all holy places is attained by seeing the Deity of Lord Gataçrama.

Text 238

käla-trayaà tu vasudhe
     yaù paçyati gataçramam
kåtvä pradakñiëaà bhéru
     viñëulokaà sa gacchati

     käla-trayam-three times; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; yaù-who; paçyati-sees; gataçramam-Gataçrama; kåtvä pradakñiëam-circumambulating; bhéru-with reverence; viñëulokam-Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     O earth-goddess, a person who sees Lord Gataçrama three times (morning, noon, and night, a day and circumambulates Him with awe and veneration, goes to Viñëuloka.

Text 239

athärdhacandra-sthitäni yamunä-térthäni catur-viàçatiù. ädi-värähe

avimukto naraù snätvä
     muktià präpnoty asaàçayam
taträtha muïcati präëän
     mama lokaà sa gacchaté
     atha-now; ardhacandra-at Ardhacandra; sthitäni-situated; yamunä-on the Yamunä; térthäni-holy places; catur-viàçatiù-24; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; avimuktaù-not liberated; naraù-a person; snätvä-having bathed; muktim-liberation; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayam-no doubt; tatra-there; atha-then; muïcati-gives up; präëän-life breath; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of 24 Holy Places at Ardhacandra on the Yamunä's Shore

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     A person who bathes there attains liberation without doubt. A person who dies there goes to My planet.

Text 240

viçränti-saàjïakaà näma
     térthaà trailokya-viçrutam
yasmin snätvä naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     viçränti-saàjïakam- näma tértham-Viçränti-tértha; trailokya-viçrutam-famous in the three worlds; yasmin-where; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     This holy place is famous in the three worlds as Viçränti-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes here is glorified in My abode.

Text 241

asti cänyataraà guhyaà
     sarva-saàsära-mokñaëam
tasmin snäto naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     asti-is; ca-and; anyataram-another; guhyam-Guhya; sarva-saàsära-mokñaëam-liberation from birth and death; tasmin-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     Guhya-tértha, which gives liberation from the cycle of birth and death, is another holy place. O goddess, a person who bathes there is glorified in My abode.

Text 242

prayägaà näma térthaà tu
     devänäà api durlabham
yasmin snäto naro devi
     agniñöoma-phalaà labhet

     prayägam- näma tértham-Prayäga-tértha; tu-indeed; devänäm-for the demigods; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain; yasmin-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; agniñöoma-of an agnistoma-yajna; phalam-result; labhet-attains;

     The holy place named Prayäga-tértha is difficult for even to the demigods to attain. O goddess, a person who bathes there attains the result of performing an agniñöoma-yajïa.

Text 243

saura-puräëe 

tatas térthaà prayägäkhyaà
     pavitraà päpa-näçanam
pitåbhyas tatra yad dattaà
     tad akñayataraà bhavet

     saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; tértham- prayägäkhyam-Prayäga-tértha; pavitram-pure; päpa-näçanam-destroying sin; pitåbhyaù-to the pitäs; tatra-there; yad-what; dattam-offered; tad-that;û akñayataram-immortality; bhavet-is.

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     Next is the holy place named Prayäga-tértha, which destroys sins and is very pure. Ancestors who receive offerings there become immortal.

Text 244

tat térthaà sevamänasya
     kåñëaà ca jagatäà gurum
niùsaàçayaà manuñyasya
     na punar-janma-sambhavaù

     tat tértham-that holy place; sevamänasya-of a servant; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; jagatäm- gurum-master of the universes; niùsaàçayam-without doubt; manuñyasya-of a person; na-not; punar-janma-sambhavaù-re-birth.

     A person who serves both this holy place and Lord Kåñëa, the master of the universes, never takes birth again. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 245

ädi-värähe 

tathä kanakhalaà térthaà
     guhyaà térthaà paraà mama
snäna-mätreëa taträpi
     näka-påñöhe sa modate

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tathä-then; kanakhalam- tértham-Kanakhala-tértha; guhyam-secret; tértham-holy place; param-transcendental; mama-My; snäna-mätreëa'simply by bathing; tatra-there;pi näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Next is My secret holy place Kanakhala-tértha. A person who once bathes there enjoys in the spiritual sky.

Text 246

asti kñetraà paraà guhyaà
     tindukaà näma nämataù
tasmin snätvä naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     asti-is; kñetram-place; param-great; guhyam-secret; tindukam- näma-named Tinduka-tértha; nämataù-from the name; tasmin-there; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     Next is the secret holy place named Tinduka-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes there become glorified in My abode.

Text 247

tataù paraà sürya-térthaà
     sarva-päpa-pranäçanam
vairocanena balinä
     süryas tö ärädhitaù purä

     tataù param-next; sürya-tértham-Sürya-tértha; sarva-päpa-pranäçanam-destroying all sins; vairocanena-Virocana's son; balinä-by Bali; süryaù-the sun-god; tu-indeed; ärädhitaù-worshiped; purä-long ago.

     Next is Surya-tértha, which destroys all sins. Long ago Virocana's son Bali worshiped the son-god there.

Text 248

ädityo 'hani saìkräntaü     grahaëe candra-süryayoù
tasmin snäto naro devi
     räjasuya-phalaà labhet

     ädityaù-the sun-god; ahani saìkräntau-on Sankranti day; grahaëe-on an eclipse; candra-of the moon; süryayoù-or the sun; tasmin-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; räjasuya-of a rajasuya sacrifice; phalam-result; labhet-attains;

     O goddess, a person who bathes there on the Äditya-saìkränti day, or on a solar or lunar eclipse, attains the result of performing a Räjasüya-yajïa.

Text 249

saura-puräëe 

tataù paraà vaöa-svämé
     térthänäà tértham uttamam
vaöa-svämiöi vikhyäto
     yatra devo diväkaraù

     saura-puräëe-in the saura Puräëa; tataù param-next; vaöa-svämé-Vatasvami; térthänäm- tértham uttamam'the best of holy places; vaöa-svämiöi-Vatasvami; vikhyätaù-famous; yatra-where; devaù-deity; diväkaraù-the sun-god.

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     Next is Vaöasvämi-tértha, the best of all hoiy places. The deity of the sun-god there is famous as Lord Vaöasvämé.

Text 250

tat térthaà caiva yo bhaktyä
     ravi-väre niñevate
präpnoty arogyam aiçvaryam
     ante ca gatim uttamäm

     tat-that; tértham-holy place; ca-and; eva-indeed; yaù-who; bhaktyä-with devotion; ravi-väre-on Sunday; niñevate-serves; präpnoti-attains» arogyam-health; aiçvaryam-wealth; ante-at the end; ca-and; gatim-destination; uttamäm-supreme.

     A person who on Sunday serves this holy place with devotion attains good health, wealth, and, at the end, the supreme destination.

Text 251 

ädi-värähe 
yatra dhruvena santaptam
     icchayä paramaà tapaù
tatra vai snäna-mätreëa
     dhruvaloke mahéyate

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yatra-where; dhruvena-by Dhruva; santaptam-austerities; icchayä-with a desire; paramam-supreme; tapaù-austerity; tatra-there; vai snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; dhruvaloke-on Dhruvaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

     In the Ädi-väräha Puräëa it is said:

     Simply by bathing there (in Dhruva-tértha, where Dhruva Mahäräja earnestly performed servere austerities, a person becomes glorified on Dhruvaloka.

Text 252

dhruva-térthe tu vasudhe
     yaù çräddhaà kurute naraù
pitån santärayate sarvän
     pitå-pakñe viçeñataù

     dhruva-térthe-at Dhruva-tértha; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; yaù-who; çräddham-sraddha; kurute-does; naraù-a person; pitån-to the pitäs; santärayate-delivers; sarvän-all; pitr„-pakñe-in the pitäs; viçeñataù-specifically.

     O earth-goddess, a person who performs çräddha at Dhruva-tértha delivers all his ancestors.

Text 253

saura-puräëe 

dhruva-térthaà iti khyätaà
     térthaà mukhyaà tataù param
yatra snänavato mokño
     dhruva eva na saàçayaù

     saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; dhruva-tértham-Dhruva-tértha; iti-thus; khyätam-known; tértham-holy place; mukhyam-best; tataù param-then; yatra-where; snänavataù-from bathing; mokñaù-liberation; dhruva-indeed; eva-indeed; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     Famous Dhruva-tértha is the best of holy places. Simply by bathing there one becomes liberated. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 254

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

gayäyäà piëòa-dänena
     yat phalaà hi nåëäà bhavet
tasmä chata-guëaà térthe
     piëòa-dänäd dhruvasya ca

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; gayäyäm-at Gayä; piëòa-of piëòa; dänena'by offering; yat-what; phalam-result; hi-indeed; nåëäm-of people; bhavet'may be; tasmä-than that; chata-guëam-a hundred times more; térthe-at the holy place; piëòa-dänäd-than offering of piëòa; dhruvasya-of Dhruva; ca-and.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     The result of offering piëòa at Dhruva-tértha is hundreds of times more than piëòa offered at Gaya.

Text 255

dhruva-térthe japo homas
     tapo dänaà surärcanam
sarva-térthä chata-guëaà
     nåëäà tatra phalaà labhet

     dhruva-térthe-at Dhruva-tértha; japaù-japa; homaùsacrifice; tapaù-austerity; dänam-charity; sura-of the demigods; arcanam-worship; sarva-térthac-than all holy places; chata-guëam-a hundred times more; nåëäm-of people; tatra-there; phalam-result; labhet-attains;

     Mantras, agnihotra-yajïas, austerities, charity, and worship of the demigods are hundreds of times more fruitful at Dhruva-tértha than at all other holy places.

Text 256

ädi-värähe puräëe 

dakñiëe dhruva-térthasya
     åñi-térthaà prakértitam
tatra snäto naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; puräëe-in the Puräëa; dakñiëe-south; dhruva-térthasya-of Dhruva-tértha; åñi-tértham-Rçi-tértha; prakértitam-glorified; tatra-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     South of Dhruva-tértha is famous Rñi-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes there becomes glorified in My abode.

Text 257

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

tasmin madhuvane puëyaà
     åñi-térthaà hareù priyam
snäna-mätreëa bhü-päla
     harau bhaktiù parä bhavet

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; puëyam-sacred; åñi-tértham-Rñi-tértha; hareù-to Lord Hari; priyam-dear; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; bhü-päla-O king; harau-for Lord Hari; bhaktiù-devotion; parä-transcendental; bhavet-is.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     In Madhuvana is sacred Rñi-tértha, which is dear to Lord Hari. O king, simply by bathing there one attains transcendental devotional service to Lord Hari.

Text 258

dakñiëe åñi-térthasya
     mokña-térthaà vasundhare
snäna-mätreëa vasudhe
     moksaà präpnoti mänavaù

     dakñiëe-in the south; åñi-térthasya-of rsi-tértha; mokña-tértham-Moksa-tértha; vasundhare-O earth; snäna-mätreëa'simply by bathing; vasudhe-O earth; moksam-liberation; präpnoti-attains; mänavaù-a person.

     O earth-goddess, south of Rsi-tértha is Mokña-tértha. O earth-goddess, simply by bathing there a person attains liberation.

Text 259

ädi-värähe 

tatraiva koöi-térthaà tu
     devänäm api durlabhamtatra snänena dänena
     mama loke mahéyate

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; koöi-tértham-Koti-tértha; tu-indeed; devänäm-for the demigods; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain; tatra-there; snänena-by âathing; dänena-by giving charity; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     This is Koöi-tértha, which even the demigods cannot attain. Simply by bathing here or giving charity here a person becomes glorified in My abode.

Text 260

tatraiva bodhi-térthaà hi
     pitånäm ati-durlabham
piëòän dattvä tu vasudhe
     pitålokaà sa gacchati

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; bodhi-tértham-Bodhi-tértha; hi-indeed; pitånäm-for the pitäs; ati-durlabham'very difficult to attain; piëòän-piëòa; dattvä-offering; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; pitålokam-to Pitrloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     This is Bodhi-tértha, which even the pitäs cannot attain. O earth-goddess, simply by offering piëòa here a person goes to Pitåloka.

Text 261

dvädaçaitäni térthäni
     devänäà durlabhäni ca
teñäà smaraëa-mätreëa
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     dvädaça-12; etäni-these; térthäni-holy places; devänäm-for the demigods; durlabhäni-difficult to attain; ca-and; teñäm-of them;û smaraëa-mätreëa-simply by remembering; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyate-becomes free.

     Even the demigods cannot attain these twelve holy places. Simply by remembering these holy places one becomes free from all sins.

Text 262

uttare tö asi-kuëòasya
     térthaà tu nara-saàjïakam
nara-térthät paraà térthaà
     na bhütaà na bhaviñyati

     uttare-in the north; tu-certainly; asi-kuëòasya-of Asi-kuëòa; tértham-holy place; tu-indeed; nara-saàjïakam-named Nara-tértha; nara-térthät'Nara-tértha; param-after; tértham-holy place; na-not; bhütam-was; na-not; bhaviñyati-will be.

     North of Asi-kuëòa is Nara-tértha. No holy place is, or ever will be, better than Nara-tértha. 

Text 263

tataù samyamanaà näma
     térthaà trailokya-viçrutam
tatra snäto naro devi
     mama lokaà sa gacchati

     tataù-next; samyamanam- näma tértham-named Samyamana-tértha; trailokya-viçrutam-famous in the three worlds; tatra-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     Next is Samyamana-tértha, which is famous in the three worlds. O goddess, a person who bathes there goes to My abode.

Text 264

dhärä-patanake snätvä
     näka-påñöhe sa modate
athätra muïcate präëän
     mama lokaà sa gacchati

     dhärä-patanake-at Dharapatanaka-tértha; snätvä-having bathed; näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys; atha-then; atra-here; muïcate'giving up; präëän-life; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     A person who bathes at Dhäräpatanaka-tértha enjoys in the spiritual sky. A person who dies here goes to My abode.

Text 265

ataù paraà näga-térthaà
     térthänäm uttamottamam
yatra snätvä divaà yänti
     ye måtäs te 'punar-bhavaù
     ataù param-next; näga-tértham-Näga-tértha; térthänäm uttama-uttamam-the very best of holy places; yatra-where; snätvä-having bathed; divam-the spiritual world; yänti-attain; ye-who; måtäù te-they; apunar-bhavaù-no birth again.

     Next is Näga-tértha, the best of holy places. They who bathe there go to the spiritual world. When they die they do not return to the world of birth and death.

Text 266

ghaëöäbharaëakaà térthaà
     sarva-päpa-pramocanam
yatra snäto naro devi
     süryaloke mahéyate

     ghaëöäbharaëakam- tértham-Ghantabhara-tértha; sarva-päpa-pramocanam-freeing from all sins; yatra-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; süryaloke-on Süryaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

     Next is Ghaëöäbharaëa-tértha, which removes all sins. O goddess, a person who bathes there becomes glorified on the sun-planet.

Text 267

térthänäm uttamaà térthaà
     brahmaloketi viçrutam
tatra snätvä ca pétvä ca
     samyato niyatäçanaù
brahmaëä samanujïäto
     viñëulokaà sa gacchati

     térthänäm uttamam- tértham-the ultimate holy place; brahmaloka-Brahmaloka; iti-thus; viçrutam-famous; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; ca-and; samyataù-controlling the senses; niyatäçanaù-fasting; brahmaëä-by Brahmä; samanujïätaù-blessed; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes. 

     Next is Brahmaloka-tértha, the best of holy places. A person who bathes there, drinks its water, fasts, and controls his senses, attains Lord Brahmä's blessings and goes to Viñëuloka.

Text 268

soma-térthe tu vasudhe
     pavitre yamunämbhasétatrabhiñekaà kurvéta
     sva-sva-karma-pratiñöhitaù
modate somaloke tu
     sa eva nätra saàçayaù

     soma-térthe-at Soma-tértha; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; pavitre-pure; yamunä-ambhasi-in the Yamuna' water; tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; sva-sva-karma-pratiñöhitaù-properly performing prescribed duties; modate-enjoys; somaloke-on Somaloka; tu-indeed; sah-this; eva-indeed; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

     O earth-goddess, a person who properly performs his prescribed duties and bathes in the waters of the Yamunä at Soma-tértha, enjoys in the moon-planet. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 269

sarasvatyäç ca patanaà
     sarva-päpa-haraà çubham
tatra snätvä naro devi
     avarëo 'pi yatir bhavet

     sarasvatyäs" ca patanam-Sarasvatipatana-tértha; sarva-päpa-haram-removing all sins; çubham-sacred; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; avarëaù-a person of the lowest class; api-even; yatir-a sannyasi; bhavet-becomes.

     Next is sacred Sarasvatépatana-tértha, which removes all sins. O goddess, if a man of even the lowest class bathes there, he becomes a sannyäsé.

Text 270

cakratérthaà tu vikhyätaà
     mäthure mama maëòale
yas tatra kurute snänaà
     tri-rätropoñito naraù
snäna-mätreëa manujo
     mucyate brahma-hatyayä

     cakratértham-Cakratértha; tu-indeed; vikhyätam-famous; mäthure-in Mathurä; mama-My; maëòale-circle; yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; tri-rätra-for three nights; upoñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; manujaù-a person; mucyate-free; brahma-hatyayä-from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

     Cakra-tértha is famous in My circle of Mathurä. A person who, fasting there for three nights, bathes there, simply by that bath becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.

Text 271

daçäçvamedham åñibhiù
     püjitaà sarvadä purä
tatra ye snänti niyatäs
     teñäà svargo na durlabhaù

     daçäçvamedham-Dasasvamedha; åñibhiù-by the sages; püjitam-worshiped; sarvadä-always; purä-formerly; tatra-there; ye-who; snänti-bathe; niyatäùcontrolling the senses; teñäm-of them; svargaù-Svargaloka; na-not; durlabhaù-difficult to attain.

     Daçäçvamedha-tértha is always worshiped by the great sages. For self-controlled persons who bathe there Svargaloka is not difficult to attain.

Text 272

térthaà tu vighnaräjasya
     puëyaà päpa-haraà çubham
tatra snätaà ca manujaà
     vighna-räjo na péòayet

     tértham-tértha; tu-indeed; vighnaräjasya-of Vighnaraja; puëyam-sacred; päpa-haram-removing sin; çubham-auspicious; tatra-there; snätam- ca-and; manujam-a person; vighna-räjaù-Vighnaräja; na-not; péòayet-troubles.

     Sacred and auspicious Vighnaräja-tértha removes sins. Vighnaräja will not trouble a person who has bathed there.

Text 273

tataç ca koti-térthaà tu
     pavitraà paramaà çubham
tatraiva snäna-mätreëa
     koöi-godänajaà phalam

     tataù-next; ca-and; koti-tértham-Koti-tértha; tu-indeed; pavitram-pure; paramam-sacred; çubham-auspicious; tatra-there; eva-indeed; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; koöi-millions; godänajam-of giving cows; phalam-result.

     Next is sacred and auspicious Koöi-tértha. By bathing there one attains the result of offering millions of cows in charity.

Text 274

     mathurä-khaëòa-mate tu viçrantià vina caturviàçatitvam. tathä hi

     mathurä-khaëòa-mate-the opion of Mathura'-khaëòa; tu-indeed; viçrantim-Viçränti-tértha; vina-except; caturviàçatitvam-24; tathä hi-furthermore.

     Without considering Viçranti-tértha, 24 holy places are described in the Mathura-khaëòa in the following words.

Text 275

catur-viàçati-térthäni
     tat-térthäd dakñiëottare
daçäçvamedha-paryantaà
     mokñäntaà ca yudhiñöhira

     catur-viàçati-24; térthäni-holy places; tat-térthäd-of that holy place; dakñiëa-south; uttare-and north; daçäçvamedha-Dasasvamedha; paryantam-until; mokña-Mokña-tértha; antam-at the end;û ca-and; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira.

     O Yudhiñöhira, beginning with Daçäçvamedha-tértha, and culminating in Mokña-tértha, there are 24 holy places north and south of that holy place.

Text 276

athätratya-parama-prasiddha-térthanaà mähätmyam. atra gokarëasya yathä saura-puräëe

tato gokarëa-térthäkhyaà
     térthaà tri-bhuvana-çrutam
vidyate viçvanäthasya
     viñëor atyanta-vallabham

     atha-then; ätratya-there; parama-prasiddha-térthanam-of very famous holy places; mähätmyam-glorification; atra-here; gokarëasya-of Gokarëa; yathä-as; saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; gokarëa-térthäkhyam- tértham-Gokarëa-tértha; tri-bhuvana-çrutam-famous in the three worlds; vidyate-is; viçvanäthasya-the master of the universes; viñëor'of Lord Viñëu; atyanta-very; vallabham-dear.

Glorification of of the Famous Holy Places There

Glorification of Gokarëa-tértha

     In the Saura Puräëa iti is said:
     Next is the holy place named Gokarëa-tértha, which is famous in the three worlds and very dear to Lord Viñëu, the master of the universes.

Text 277

kåñëa-gaìgäyäù. ädi-värähe 

païca-térthabhiñekä ca
     yat phalaà labhate naraù
kåñëa-gaìgä daça-guëaà
     diçate tu dine dine

     kåñëa-gaìgäyäù-of the Kåñëa-gaìgä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; païca-five; tértha-holy places; abhiñekä-because of bathing; ca-and; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-obtains; naraù kåñëa-gaìgä-Kåñëa-gaìgä; daça-guëam-ten times more; diçate-shows; tu-indeed; dine dine-every day.

Glorification of Kåñëa-gaìgä

     The pious result a person attains by bathing at five holy places is attained, multiplied by ten, every day at Kåñëa-gaìgä.

Text 278

vaikuëöha-térthasya 

vaikuëöha-térthe yaù snäti
     mucyate sarva-pätakaiù
sarva-päpa-vinirmukto
     brahmalokaà sa gacchati

     vaikuëöha-térthasya-of Vaikuëöha-tértha; vaikuëöha-térthe-at Vaikuëöha-tértha; yaù-one who; snäti-bathes; mucyate-is freed; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-freed from all sins; brahmalokam-to Brahmaloka; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of Vaikuëöha-tértha

     A person who bathes at Vaikuëöha-tértha becomes free from all sins. Free from all sins, he goes to the spiritual world.

Text 279-280

asi-kuëòasya

ekä varäha-saàjïä ca
     tathä näräyaëé parä
vämanä ca tåtéyä vai
     caturthé laìgalé çubhä
etäç catasro yaù paçyet
     snätvä kuëòe 'si-saàjïake
catuù-sägara-paryantä
     kräntä tena dharä dhruvam
térthänäà mathuränäà ca
     sarveñäà phalam açnute

     asi-kuëòasya-of Asi-kuëòa; ekä-one; varäha-saàjïä-named Varäha; ca-and; tathä-then; näräyaëé-Näräyaëa; parä-great; vämanä-Vämana; ca-and; tåtéyä-third; vai-indeed; caturthé-fourth; laìgalé-Balaräma; çubhäh-auspicious; etäù-these; catasraù-four; yaù-who; paçyet-may see; snätvä-having bathed; kuëòe asi-saàjïake-in Asi-kuëòa; catuù-sägara-paryantä kräntä-up to the four oceans; tena-by him; dharä-the earth; dhruvam-indeed; térthänäm-of holy places; mathuränäm-of Mathurä; ca-and; sarveñäm-of all; phalam-the result; açnute-enjoys.

Glorification of of Asi-kuëòa

     First is Varäha. Then is Näräyaëa. Third is Vämana. Fourth is Balaräma. A person who sees these four Deities and bathes in Asi-kuëòa attains the result of visiting all holy places in Mathura' and all other holy places within the boundaries of the world's four seas.

Text 281

atha kälindé-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe 

gaìgä çata-guëä proktä
     mäthure mama maëòale
yamunä viçrutä devi
     nätra käryä vicaraëä

     atha-now; kälindé-of the Yamunä; mähätmyam-glorification;. ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëä-a hundred times more; proktä-said; mäthure-in Mathurä; mama-My; maëòale-circle; yamunä-Yamunä; viçrutä-famous; devi-O goddess; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicaraëä-doubt.

Glorification of the Yamunä

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O goddess, the Yamunä in My circle of Mathura' is a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 282

tatra térthäni guhyäni
     bhaviñyanti mamänaghe
yeñu snäto naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     tatra-there; térthäni-holy places; guhyäni-secret; bhaviñyanti-will be; mama-My; anaghe-O sinless one; yeñu-in which; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

     O sinless one, in the Yamunä will be many secret places sacred to Me. O goddess, a person who bathes in them is glorified in My abode.

Text 283

yamunä-salile snätaù
     çucir bhütvä jitendriyaù
samäbhyarcyäcyutaà samyäk
     präpnoti paramäà gatim

     yamunä-salile-in the Ymaunä's waters; snätaù-bathed; çucir-pure; bhütvä-becoming; jita-conquered; indriyaù-senses; samäbhyarcya-having worshiped; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; samyäk-completely; präpnoti-attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

     A person who bathes in the Yamunä's waters becomes pure and sense-controlled. He worships Lord Acyuta and attains the supreme destination.

Text 284

värähe 

nadé tatra varärohe
     çubha puëyojjvalodakä
vivasvataù sutä puëyä
     yamunä vai bhaviñyati

     värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; nadé-river; tatra-there; varärohe-O beautiful one; çubha-auspicious; puëya-pure; ujjvala-splendid; udakä-waters; vivasvataù-of the sun-god; sutä-the daughter; puëyä-saintly; yamunä-Yamunä; vai-indeed; bhaviñyati-will be.

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O beautiful girl, in this place will be the Yamunä, the auspicious, pure, and splendid river that is the saintly daughter of the sun-god.

Text 285

sä prayäge tu suçroni
     brahma-kñetre mahä-yaçaù
sameñyati na sandeho
     gaìgäyäs tad anantaram

     sä-she; prayäge-at Prayäga; tu-indeed; suçroni-O beautiful girl; brahma-kñetre-in Brahma-kñetra; mahä-great; yaçaù-fame; sameñyati-will meet; na-not; sandehaù-doubt; gaìgäyaù-the Ganges; tad anantaram-after.

     O beautiful girl, this glorious river will meet the Ganges at Prayäga in Brahma-kñetra. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 286

mätsye yudhiñöhira-närada-samväde 

tatra snätvä ca pétvä ca
     yamunäyäà yudhiñöhira
kértanäl labhate puëyaà
     dåñövä bhadräëi paçyati

     mätsye-in the Matsya Puräëa; yudhiñöhira-närada-samväde-in the conversation of Närada and Yudhiñöhira; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; ca-and; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; kértanäl-from the glorification; labhate-attains; puëyam-piety; dåñövä-having seen; bhadräëi-auspiciousness; paçyati-sees.

     In the Matsya Puräëa, in the conversation of Yudhiñöhira and Närada, it is said:

     O Yudhiñöhira, a person who bathes in the Yamunä, glorifies it, and drinks its waters, attains piety. He sees auspiciousness.

Text 287

avagähya ca pétvä ca
     punäty asaptamaà kulam
präëäàs tyajati yas tatra
     sa yäti paramäà gatim

     avagähya-plunging; ca-and; pétvä-drinking; ca-and; punäti-purifies; ä-saptamam-up to seven; kulam-family; präëän-life breathl; tyajati-abandond» yaù-one who; tatra-there; sah-he; yäti-goes; paramäm- gatim-to the supreme destination.

     A person who enters the Yamunä and drinks its waters purifies seven generations of ancestors. A person who dies in the Yamunä goes to the supreme destination.

Text 288

viñëu-dharmottare 

yatra kvacana kälindyäà
     kåtvä çräddhaà narädhipa
akñayaà phalam äpnoti
     näka-påñöhe sa modate

     viñëu-dharma-uttare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; yatra-where; kvacana-somewhere; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; kåtvä-having done; çräddham-sraddha; narädhipa-O king; akñayam-eternal; phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys.

     In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:

     O king, a person who offers çräddha by the Yamunä attains an eternal result. He enjoys in the spiritual sky.

Text 289

padma-puräëe pätäla-khaëòe 

raso yaù paramädhäraù
     sac-cid-änanda-lakñaëaù
brahmety-upaniñad-gétaù
     sa eva yamunä svayam
pävanäyäsya jagataù
     sarid bhütvä sasära ha

     padma-puräëe pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; rasaù-nectar; yaù-which; paramädhäraù-supreme river; sac-eternal; cid-spiritual;änanda-blissful; lakñaëaù-characteristics; brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; upaniñad-in the Upaniñads; gétaù-called; sa-that; eva-indeed; yamunä-Yamunä; svayam-personally; pävanäya-to purify; asya-of this; jagataù-universe; sarid-a river; bhütvä-having become;û sasära ha-flowed.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     The flood of eternal, blissful spiritual nectar, which is called Brahman in the Upaniñads, is the Yamunä, which has become a flowing river to purify the worlds.

Text 290

tathä 

pätaké pätakän muktaù
     puëyäòhyaù syäd apätaké
phaläbhisandhi-rahitaù
     kälindyäm eva mucyate

     tathä-then; pätaké-sinful; pätakät-fropm sin; muktaù-free; puëyäòhyaù-pious; syäd-becomes; apätaké'sinless; phala-abhisandhi-rahitaù-free from sinful reaction; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; eva-indeed; mucyate-is liberated.

     By the Yamunä's touch a sinful person becomes free from sin, pious and saintly. Free from past sinful reactions, he becomes liberated.

Text 291

snänädi-karma kälindyäà
     yena kenäpi yat kåtam
yathävad ayathävad vä
     tat sädhu phalavad bhavet

     snäna-bathing; ädi-beginning with; karma-action; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; yena kenäpi-by someone; yat-which; kåtam-done; yathävad-properly; ayathävad-improperly; vä-or; tat-that; sädhu-sacred; phalavad-result; bhavet-is.

     Whether one bathes or worships the Yamunä properly or improperly he will attain the sacred result.

Text 292

viçeña eva kälindyäà
     måte yati hareù padam
mathurä-saìgatayaà tu
     harir eva bhaven naraù

     viçeñah-specifically; eva-indeed; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; måte-dead; yati-attains; hareù-of Lord Hari; padam-the feet; mathurä-saìgatayam-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; harir-Lord Hari; eva-indeed; bhavet-becomes; naraù-person.

     A person who dies in the Yamunä goes to the abode of Lord Hari. A person who dies in the Yamunä as it flows through Mathura' attains a spiritual form like that of Lord Hari.

Text 293

tatraiva hara-gauri-samväde 

brahma-jïänena mucyante
     käçyäà ca maraëe naraù
athavä snäna-mätreëa
     kåñëäyäà kåñëa-sannidhau

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; hara-gauri-samväde-in the conversation of Çiva and Gauré; brahma-jïänena-with spiritual knowledge; mucyante-are free; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; ca-and; maraëe-in death; naraù-a person; athavä-or; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; kåñëäyäm-in the Yamunä; kåñëa-sannidhau-near Kåñëa.

     In the same scripture, in the conversation between Çiva and Gauré, it is said:

     By attaining spiritual knowledge, they who die at Väräëasé become liberated. On the other hand, simply by bathing in the Yamunä, the devotees attain the association of Lord Kåñëa.

Text 294

yamunä-jala-kallole
     kréòate devaké-sutaù
tatra snätvä mahä-devi
     sarva-tértha-phalaà labhet

     yamunä-jala-kallole-in the Yamunä's waves;; kréòate'plays; devaké-sutaù-Devaké's son; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; mahä-devi-O goddess; sarva-tértha-of all holy places; phalam-result; labhet-attains.

     Devaké's son plays in the Yamunä's waves. O great goddess, a person who bathes there attains the result of visiting all holy places.

Text 295

aho abhägyaà lokasya
     na pétaà yamunä-jalam
go-gopa-gopikä-saìge
     yatra kréòati kaàsa-hä

     ahaù-Oh; abhägyam-misofrtune; lokasya-of the people; na-not; pétam-drunk; yamunä-jalam-Yamuna' water; gaù-cows; gopa-gopas; gopikä-gopés; saìge-in company; yatra-where; kréòati-plays; kaàsa-hä-Kåñëa.

     Oh the misfortune of they who have not drunk the Yamunä's waters, where the killer of Kaàsa plays with the cows, gopas, and gopés!

Text 296

tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe

cid-änandamayé säkñäd
     yamunä yama-bhéti-nut

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvana-khaëòa; cid-änandamayé-full of spiritual bliss; säkñäd-directly; yamunä-Yamunä; yama-of Yama;; bhéti-the fear; nut-removing.

     In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:

     The spiritual, blisssful Yamunä removes the fear of Yamaräja.

Text 297

käla-viçeñe tatra snänädi-phalam. ädi-värähe 

jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
     samabhyarcya janärdanam
dhanyo 'sau piëòa-nirväpaà
     yamunäyäà kariñyati

     käla-time; viçeñe-specific; tatra-there; snäna-bathing; ädi-beginning with; phalam-result; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-in the çukla-dvädaçé; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Janärdana; dhanyaù-fortunate; .asau-he; piëòa-nirväpam-offering piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; kariñyati-will do.

The Result of Bathing and Other Devotional Activities Performed There at Certain Specifé Times

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     A person who during the çukla-ekädaçé of the month of Jyaiñöha (May-June, worships Lord Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore, becomes fortunate and attains the result of offering piëòa.

Text 298-299

çri-viñëu puräëe
     
yamunä-salile snätaù
     puruño muni-sattamäjyaiñöha-müle 'male pakñe
     dvädaçyäm upaväsa-kåt

samabhyarcyäcyutaà samyäg
     yamunäyäà samähitaù
açvamedhasya yajïasya
     präpnoty adhikajaà phalam

     çri-viñëu puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; yamunä-salile-in the Yamunä's water;; snätaù-bathed; puruñaù-a person; muni-sattama-O great sage; jyaiñöha-müle-in the star Mula in month of Jyaistha; amale pakñe dvädaçyäm'in the çukla-dvädaçé; upaväsa-kåt-fasting; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; samyäk-completely; yamunäyäm- samähitaù-in the Yamunä; açvamedhasya yajïasya-of an asvamedha sacrifice; präpnoti-attains» adhikajam-greater; phalam-result.

     In the Çré Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

     O great sage, a person who, fasting, bathes in the Yamunä's waters during the Müla'-nakñatra in the çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Jyaiñöha, and then with a peaceful heart worships Lord Acyuta on the Yamunä's shore, attains a result greater than the result of an açvamedha-yajïa.

Text 300-301

tatraiva pitåëäà väkyam

kaçcid asmat-kule jätaù
     kälindé-saliläplutaù
arcayiñyati govindaà
     mathuräyäm upoñitaù

jyaiñöha-müle 'male pakñe
     yenaiva vayam apy uta
paräm åddhim aväpa syämas
     täritäù sva-kulodbhavaiù

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; pitåëäm-of pitäs; väkyam-statement; kaçcid-someone; asmat-kule-in our family; jätaù-born; kälindé-of the Yamunä; salila-in the water; äplutaù-bathed; arcayiñyati-will worship; govindam-Lord Govinda; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä» upoñitaù-fasting; jyaiñöha-müle-in the month of Jyaistha during the star Mula; amale pakñe-in the bright half; yena-by whom; eva-indeed; vayam-we; api-also; uta-indeed; paräm-supreme; åddhim-opulence; aväpa-attained; syämaùare täritäù-delivered; sva-kulodbhavaiù-with our relatives.

     In the same scripture, the Pitäs say:
     Someone in our family will fast, bathe in the Yamunä's waters, and worship Lord Govinda in Mathura' during the Mülä-nakñatra in the bright half of the month of Jyaiñöha. Becasue of his deed we were delivered and we attained sublime opulence. 

Text 302

jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
     samabhyarcya janärdanam
dhanyo 'sau piëòa-nirväpaà
     yamunäyäà kariñyati

     jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-in the çukla-dvädaçé; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Lord Janärdana; dhanyaù-fortunate; asau-he; piëòa-nirväpam-offering piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; kariñyati-will do.

     A person who during the çukla-dvädaçé in the month of Jyaiñöha worships Lord Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore is fortunate. He will attain the result of offering piëòa. 

Text 303

brahma-vaivarte 

jyaiñöhämüläsite pakñe
     samabhyarcya janärdanaà
dhanyänäà kulajaù piëòän
     yamunäyäà pradäsyati

     brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; jyaiñöhä-mülä-site pakñe-in the Mula-naksatra in the bright half of the month of Jyaistha; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Lord Janärdana; dhanyänäm-fortunate; kulajaù-descendent; piëòän-piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; pradäsyati-will give.

     In the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa it is said: 

     A person who during Mülä-nakñatra in the bright fortnight of the month of Jyaiñöha worships Lord Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore, attains the same result a person born in a noble family attains when offering piëòa.

Text 304-305

båhan-näradéye

jyaiñöhe mäsi paurëamäsyäà
     mülarkñe präyato naraù
snätvä ca yamunäyäà vai
     mathuräyäm upoñitaù
abhyarcya vidhinä viñëuà
     yat phalaà labhate dvijaù
tat pravaksyämi vaù samyäk
     çåëudhvaà gadato mama

     båhan-näradéye-in the Brhan Narada Puräëa; jyaiñöhe mäsi-in the month of Jyaistha; paurëamäsyäm-in the full moon; mülarkñe-in the Mula-naksatra; präyataù-mostly; naraù-a person; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; vai-indeed; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; upoñitaù-fasting; abhyarcya-worshiping; vidhinä-according to the rules; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-attains; dvijaù-a brähmaëa; tat-that; pravaksyämi-I will say; vaù-to you; samyäk-completely; çåëudhvam-please listen; gadataù-speaking; mama-My.

     In the Båhan-Närada Puräëa it is said:

     Listen, O brähmaëas, and I will tell you the result a person attains when, during the Müla'-nakñatra in the full moon of the month of Jyaiñöha, he fasts in Mathurä, bathes in the Yamunä, and then worships Lord Viñëu.

Text 306

janmäyutärjitaiù päpair
     muktaù koöi-kulänvitaù
brahmaëaù padam äsädya
     tatraiva parimucyate

     janma-births; äyuta-billions; arjitaiù päpair-from the sins; muktaù-free; koöi-kula-anvitaù-with millions of relatives; brahmaëaù-of Brahmä; padam-the abode; äsädya-attaining; tatra-there; eva-indeed; parimucyate-is liberated.

     He becomes free from the sins of billions of births. With millions of his family he goes to Brahma's abode and then he becomes liberated.

Text 307 and 308

padma-puräëe

saìkräntau ravi-väre ca
     saptamyäà vaidhåtau tathä
vyatipäte ca hastarkñe
     tväñöre pauïce punar-vasau
ekadäçyäà caturdaçyäm
     añöamyäà ca vidhukñaye
paurëamäsyäà ca pürvoktaà
     phalaà çata-guëaà bhavet

     padma-puräëe-in the Padma Puräëa; saìkräntau-in Sankranti; ravi-väre-on Sunday; ca-and; saptamyäm-on saptami; vaidhåtau-during Vaidhrti; tathä-then; vyatipäte-on Vyatipata; ca-and; hastarkñe-during Hasta-naksatra; tväñöre-Tvastra; pauïce'panca; punarvasau-Punarvasu; ekadäçyäm-ekädaçé; caturdaçyäm-caturdasi; añöamyäm-astami; ca-and; vidhukñaye-the new moon; paurëamäsyäm-the full moon; ca-and; pürva-previously; uktam-said; phalam-result; çata-guëam-increased a hundred times; bhavet-will be.

     In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

     On Saìkränti, Sunday, Saptamé, Vaidhåti, Vyatipäta, Hastä-nakñatra, Tväñöra, Pauïca, Punarvasu, Ekädaçé, Caturdaçé, Añöamé, the new moon, and the full moon, the previously described results are multiplied hundreds of times.

Text 309

tad eva koöi-guëitaà
     grahaëe candra-süryayoù
dvädaçyäm arcayed viñëum
     ekadaçyäm upoñya yaù
kälindyäà tasya sulabhaà
     tad viñëoù paramaà padam

     tad-that; eva-indeed; koöi-guëitam-multiplied by millions of times; grahaëe candra-süryayoù-in an eclipse of the sun or the moon; dvädaçyäm-on a dvädaçé; arcayed-may worship; viñëum-Viñëu; ekadaçyäm-on ekädaçé; upoñya-fasting; yaù-who; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; tasya-of him; sulabham-easy to attain; tad-that; viñëoù-of Viñëu; paramam-supreme; padam-abode.

     During a solar or lunar eclipse the results are multiplied by millions of times. A person who by the shore of the Yamuna' worships Lord  Viñëu on Dvädaçé or fasts on Ekädaçé, easily attains Lord Viñëu's transcendental abode.

Text 310

atha mathurä-brähmaëa-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe 

anåco mäthuro yaç ca
     catur-vedas tathä paraù
catur-vedaà parityajya
     mäthuraà bhojayed dvijam
     atha-now; mathurä-brähmaëa-mähätmyam-glorification of the brähmaëas in Mathurä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anrcaù-not learned in the Vedé mantras; mäthuraù-from Mathurä; yaù-who; ca-and; catur-vedaù-learned in the four Vedas; tathä-so; paraù-greater; catur-vedam-the four Vedas; parityajya-abandoning; mäthuram-from Mathurä; bhojayed-should feed; dvijam-the brähmaëa.

Glorification of Mathurä's Brähmaëas

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     There are two brähmaëas. One lives in Mathura' and is not learned in the Vedas. The other does not live in Mathurä, although he knows the four Vedas very well. One should ignore the brähmaëa learned in the four Vedas and should feed the brähmaëa who lives in Mathurä.

Text 311

kåñi-balo duräcäro
     dharma-märga-paräì-mukhaù
édåço 'pi püjanéyo
     mäthuro mama rüpa-dhåk

     kåñi-balaù-a farmer; duräcäraù-a ruffian; dharma-märga-parän--mukhaù-one averse to the path of religion; édåçaù-like this; api-even; püjanéyaù-should be worshiped; mäthuraù-from Mathurä; mama-My; rüpa-dhåk-own form.

     Whether a farmer, a ruffian, or a sinner who turns his face from the path of religion, any resident of Mathura' should be worshiped. He is representation of My own form.

Text 312

mäthuränäà ca yad rüpaà
     tad rüpaà me vasundare
ekasmin bhojite vipre
     koöir bhavati bhojitäù

     mäthuränäm-of the people of Mathurä; ca-and; yad rüpam-what form; tad rüpam-that form; me-of Me; vasundare'O earth; ekasmin-in one place; bhojite-fed; vipre-a brähmaëa; koöir-millions; bhavati'is; bhojitäù-fed.

     O earth-goddess, the brähmaëas of Mathura' are My own form. When one of them is fed it is like feeding millions of other brähmaëas.

Text 313

mäthurä mama püjyä hi
     mäthurä mama vallabhäù
mäthure parituñöe vai
     tuñöo 'haà nätra saàçayaù

     mäthurä-from Mathurä; mama-My; püjyä-to be worshiped; hi-indeed; mäthurä-the people of Mathurä; mama-My; vallabhäù-dear; mäthure-in Mathurä; parituñöe-pleased; vai-indeed; tuñöaù-pleased; aham-I; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

     Mathurä's brähmaëas are worshiped by Me. Mathurä's brähmaëas are dear to Me. When Mathurä's brähmaëas are pleased, I am pleased. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 314

bhavanti puëya-térthäni
     puëyäny ayatanäni ca
maìgaläni ca sarväni
     yatra tiñöhanti mäthuräù

     bhavanti-are; puëya-térthäni-holy places; puëyäny ayatanäni-holy temples; ca-and; maìgaläni-auspicious; ca-and; sarväni-all; yatra-where; tiñöhanti-stand; mäthuräù-people of Mathurä.

     All holy places, all holy temples, and all auspiciousnesses stay where Mathurä-brähmaëas reside.

Text 315

atha mathurä-väsi-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe 

ye vasanti mahä-bhäge
     mathuräà itare janäù
te 'pi yänti paräà siddhià
     mat-prasädän na saàçayaù

     atha-now; mathurä-väsi-mähätmyam-glorification of the residents of Mathurä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ye-who; vasanti'reside; mahä-bhäge-O fortunate one; mathuräm-Mathura' itare janäù-other people; te-they; api yänti-attain; paräm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; mat-prasädät-from My mercy; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

Glorification of the Residents of Mathurä

     In the Ädi-väräha Puräëa it is said:
     O fortunate one, they who reside in Mathura', but are not brähmaëas, by My mercy attain the supreme perfection. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 316

yas tatra nivased devi
     samyato hi jitendriyaù
tri-kälam api bhuïjäno
     väyu-bhakña-samo hi saù

     yaù-who; tatra-there; nivased-resides; devi-O goddess; samyataù-controlled; hi-indeed; jita-indriyaù-conquered the senses; tri-kälam'three times; api-also; bhuïjänaù-eating; väyu-bhakña-samaù-equal to someone who eats the wind; hi-indeed; saù-he.

     O goddess, a person who lives there (in Mathurä), although he be a prisoner of his senses, is like one who has conquered them, and although he eats three times a day, is like an sceté that only eats the wind.

Text 317

mathuräyäà mahä-puryäà
     ye vasanty açcui-vratäù
balibhikña-pradätäro
     deväs te nara-vigrahäù

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mahä-puryäm-the great city; ye-who; vasanti-reside; açcui-to uncelan deeds; vratäù-vowed; balibhikña-pradätäraù-granting benedictions; deväù-demigods; te-they; nara-vigrahäù-in the forms of men.

     They who, although avowed to unclean works, live in the great city of Mathurä, are demigods that grant benedictions, although they bear human forms.     

Text 318

mathurä-väsino lokäù
     sarve te mukti-bhäjanäù
api kéöäù pataìgo vä
     tiryag-yoni-gato 'pi vä

     mathurä-väsino lokäù-residents of Mathurä; sarve-all; te-they; mukti-bhäjanäù-liberated; api'even; kéöäù-worms and insects; pataìgaù-moths and birds; vä tiryag-yoni-gataù-beasts; api-even; vä-or.

     They who live in Mathurä, even the worms, insects, moths, birds, and beasts, are all liberated.

Text 319

tiñöhed yuga-sahasraà tu
     padänaikena yaù pumän
tasyädhikaà bhavet puëyaà
     mathuräyäà niväsinaù

     tiñöhed-may stay; yuga-sahasram-for na thousand yugas; tu-indeed; pada-anaikena-standing on one foot; yaù-who; pumän-a person; tasya-of him; adhikam-greater; bhavet-is; puëyam-piety; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; niväsinaù-residents.

     By living in Mathura' one attains more piety than by performing the harsh austerity of standing on one foot for a thousand yugas.

Text 320

para-dara-ratä ye ca
     ye narä ajitendriyäù
mathurä-väsinaù sarve
     te devä nara-vigrahäù 

     para-dara-ratä-adulterers; ye-who; ca-and; ye-who; naräh-people; ajitendriyäù-uncontrolled senses» mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; sarve-all; te-they; deväh-demigods; nara-vigrahäù'in huamn form. 

     They who live in Mathura' and are adulterers, or are defeated by their senses, are all demigods in human form.

Text 321

siddhä bhüta-gaëäù sarve
     ye ca deva-gaëä bhuvi
mathurä-väsino lokäàs
     te paçyanti catur-bhujän

     siddhäh-Siddhas; bhüta-gaëäù-Bhutas; sarve-all; ye-who; ca-and; deva-gaëäh-devas; bhuvi-on the earth; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; lokäàùpeople; te-they; paçyanti'see; catur-bhujän-with four arms.

     All Siddhas, Bhütas, and Devas who come to earth see the people of Mathura' as four-armed residents of Vaikuëöha.

Text 322

mathuräyäà ye vasanti
     viñëu-rüpä hi te khalüajïänäs tän na paçyanti
     paçyanti jïäna-cakñuñaù

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ye-who; vasanti-reside; viñëu-rüpäh-forms of Viñëu; hi-indeed; te-they; khalu-indeed; ajïänäù-unknowing; tan-them; na-not; paçyanti-see; paçyanti-see; jïäna-of knowledge; cakñuñaù-with eyes.

     They who live in Mathura' have forms like Lord Viñëu's form. The ignorant cannot see it, but they who have eyes of knowledge see it.

Text 323

mathuräyäà pure yas tu
     präsädaà pura-väsinäm
kärayitvä tu manujo
     jäyate sa catur-bhujaù

     mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; pure-in the city; yaù-who; tu-indeed; präsädam-a palace; pura-väsinäm-of the people of the city; kärayitvä-creating; tu-indeed; manujaù-a person; jäyate-is born; sah-he; catur-bhujaù-with four arms.

     A person who builds a palace for the residents of Mathura' becomes in his next birth a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.

Text 324

skände 

mathurä-väsino lokän
     manasäpi dviñanti ye
na jätu bhavitä teñäà
     viraho nirayaiù saha

     skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; lokän-worlds; manasä-with the heart; api-even; dviñanti-hate; ye-who; na-not; jätu'ever; bhavitä-will be; teñäm- virahaù-separation; nirayaiù-from hell; saha-with.

     In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

     For they who in their hearts hate the residnets of Mathura' the tortures of hell will not cease.

Text 325

mathurä-väsinäà kurvanty     upakärän manäg api
ye loka nästi teñäà hi
     puëyasyäntaù kadäcana

     mathurä-väsinäm-of the residents of Mathurä; kurvanti-do; upakärän-help; manäg-slightly; api-even; ye-who; lokäh-people; na-not; asti'is; teñäm-of them; hi-indeed; puëyasya-of piety; antaù'end; kadäcana-ever.

     The piety gained by they who, even slightly, help the residents of Mathura', will never end.

Text 326

pädme pätäla-khaëòe 

dhanyä mathurä-väsäs te
     vasanti hari-sannidhau
catur-varëa-varaù so 'yaà
     pibate yamunä-jalam

     pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; dhanyäh-fortunate; mathurä-väsäù-residents of Mathurä; te-they; vasanti-reside; hari-sannidhau-near Lord Hari; catur-varëa-varaù-best of the four varnas; saù ayam-he; pibate-drinks; yamunä-jalam-Yamuna' water.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:

     The residents of Mathura' are fortunate, for they live near Lord Hari. A person who drinks the water of the Yamuna' belongs to the best of the four varëas.

Text 327

svapacäù pavanäs te 'tra
     vasanti mathurä-pure
anya-deça-stha-vipräëäà
     mathurä-väsino 'dhikäù

     svapacäù-dogeaters; pavanäù-purified; te-they; atra-here; vasanti-reside; mathurä-pure'in Mathurä; anya-deça-stha-in another country; vipräëäm-brähmaëas; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; adhikäù-greater.

     Dogeaters who live in Mathura' City become purified. The ordinary people of Mathura' are better than the brähmaëas in other places.

Text 328

tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe 

mathurä-väsino dhanyä
     manyä api divaukasäm
agaëya-mahimänas te
     sarva eva catur-bhujäù

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvana-khaëòa; mathurä-väsinaù-the residents of Mathurä; dhanyäh-fortunate; manyäh-glorious; api'also; divaukasäm-of the residents of heaven; agaëya-measureless; mahimänaù-glories; te-they; sarve-all;; eva-indeed; catur-bhujäù-with four arms.

     In the same scripture, in the Nirvana-khaëòa, it is said:

     The residents of Mathura' are fortunate. They are more exalted than the demigods in heaven. Their glories cannot be counted. They are all four-armed residents of Vaikuëöha.

Text 329

mathurä-väsinäà ye tu
     doñaà paçyanti mänaväù
te sva-doñaà na paçyanti
     janma-måtyu-sahasra-dam

     mathurä-väsinäm-residents of Mathurä; ye-who; tu-indeed; doñam-fault; paçyanti-see; mänaväù-people; te-they; sva-doñam-own fault; na-not; paçyanti-see; janma-births; måtyu-and deaths; sahasra-thousands; dam-giving.

     People who see fault in the residents of Mathura' do not see their own mistake, which will bring them thousands of births and deaths.

Text 330

taträdi-väräha-mataà madhuvanaà purädbhir apy astéti. tathä hi 

tena dåñöä ca sä ramyä 
     väsavasya puré yathä
vanair dvädaçabhir yuktä
     puëya päpa-harä çubhä

     tatra-there; ädi-väräha-matam-the opinion of Ädi-varäha Puräëa; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; purädbhir-with the floods; api-even; asti-is; iti-thus; tathä'so; hi-indeed; tena-by him; dåñöä-seen; ca-and; sä-it; ramyä-charming; väsavasya-of Indra; puré'the city; yathä-as; vanair-with forests; dvädaçabhir-12; yuktä-endowed; puëya-sacred; päpa-harä'removing sins; çubhä-auspicious.

     The Ädi-varäha Puräëa considers that the forest of Madhuvana continues to exist after the great flood of cosmé devastation. It further says:

     For one who sees sacred and auspicious Mathurä, which has twelve forests, and which destroys sins, it is as beautiful as Indra's capitol.

Text 331

atha dvädaça-vananaà mähätmyam. tatra madhuvanasya 

ramyaà madhuvanaà näma
     viñëu-sthänam anuttamam
yad dåñövä manujo devi
     sarvän kamän aväpnuyät

     atha-now; dvädaça-vananam-of the 12 forests; mähätmyam-glorification; tatra-there; madhuvanasya-of Madhuvana; ramyam-charming; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; näma-named; viñëu-sthänam-Viñëu's place; anuttamam-peerless; yad-which; dåñövä-having seen; manujaù-a person; devi-O goddess; sarvän-all; kamän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

Glorification of Mathurä's Twelve Forests

Glorification of of Madhuvana

     O goddess, a person who sees Lord Viñëu's beautiful and peerless abode of Madhuvana, attains all his desires.

Text 332

tälavanasya. ädi-värähe 

vanaà tälavanäkhyaà ca
     dvitéyaà vanam uttamam
yatra snätvä naro devi
     kåta-kåtyo 'bhijäyate

     tälavanasya-of Talavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; vanam- tälavanäkhyam-Talavana forest; ca-and; dvitéyam-second; vanam-forest; uttamam-transcendental; yatra-where; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; abhijäyate-becomes.

Glorification of Tälavana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:
     The second forest is transcendental Tälavana. O goddess, a person who bathes there attains all success.

Text 333

tatra kuëòaà svaccha-jalaà
     nélotpala-vibhüñitam
tatra snänena dänena
     väïchitaà phalam äpnuyät

     tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; svaccha-clear; jalam-water; nélotpala-with blue lotuses; vibhüñitam-ornamented; tatra-there; snänena-by bathing; dänena-by charity; väïchitam-desired; phalam-result; äpnuyät-attains.

     The clear-water lake there is decorated with blue lotuses. By bathing there or giving charity there, one attains his desire.

Text 334

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

aho talavanaà puëyaà
     yatra tälair hato 'suraù
hitäya yädavänäà ca
     ätma-kréòaëakäya ca

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; talavanam-Talavana; puëyam-sacred; yatra-where; tälair-by tala trees; hataù-killed; asuraù-demon; hitäya-for the welfare; yädavänäm-of the Yädavas; ca-and; ätma-kréòaëakäya-for pastimes; ca-and.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     This is sacred Talavana where, to help the Lord's pastimes and to benefit the Yädavas, a demon was killed by palm trees,.

Text 335

yas tatra kurute snänaà
     yatra kutra sthite jale
yädavatvaà aväpnoti
     dehänte deva-darçanam

     yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; yatra-where; kutra-where?; sthite-sitauted; jale'water; yädavatvam-the state of being a Yädava; aväpnoti-attains; deha-of the body; ante-at the end; deva-of the Lord; darçanam-the sight.

     A person who bathes in the waters there becomes, at the end of his body, a Yädava who personally sees the Lord.

Text 336

kumudavanasyädi-värähe 

vanaà kumudvanäkhyaà ca
     tåtéyam uttamaà param
tatra gatvä naro devi
     kåta-kåtyo 'bhijäyate

     kumudavanasya-of Kumudavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; vanam- kumudvanäkhyam-Kumudavana; ca-and; tåtéyam'third; uttamam-supreme; param-next; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; abhijäyate-becomes.

Glorification of Kumudavana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     The third forest is transcendental Kumudavana. O goddess, a person who goes there attains all success.

Text 337

kämyavanasyädi-värähe 

caturthaà kämyakavanaà
     vanänäà vanam uttamam
tatra gatvä naro devi
     mama loke mahéyate

     kämyavanasya-of Kamyavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; caturtham-the fourth; kämyakavanam-Kamayavana» vanänäm- vanam uttamam-the best of forests; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.

Glorification of Kämyavana

     The fourth is Kämyavana, the best of all forests. O goddess, a person who goes there is glorified in My abode.

Text 338

vimalasya ca kuëòe tu
     sarvaà päpaà vimokñyate
yas tatra muïcati präëän
     mama lokaà sa gacchati

     vimalasya-pure; ca-and; kuëòe-in the lake; tu-indeed; sarvam-all; päpam-sin; vimokñyate-free; yaù-who; tatra-there; muïcati-gives up; präëän-life; mama-My; lokam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

     In nearby Vimala-kuëòa one becomes free from all sins and, when leaving this life, goes to My abode.

Text 339

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

tataù kämyavanaà räjan
     yatra bälye sthito hariù
snäna-mätreëa sarveñäà
     sarva-käma-phala-pradam

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tataù-then; kämyavanam-Kamayavana; räjan'O king; yatra-where; bälye-in childhood; sthitaù-situated; hariù-Hari; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; sarveñäm-of all; sarva-käma-phala-pradam-granting all desires.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura-khaëòa, it is said:
     
     O king, next is Kämyavana, where Lord Hari stayed in His childhood. Simply by bathing here, any person will attain all his desires.

Text 340

tatra käma-saro räjan
     gopikä-ramaëaà saraù
tatra tértha-sahasräëi
     saräàsi ca påthak påthak

     tatra-there; käma-saraù-Kama-sarivara; räjan-O king; gopikä-ramaëam- saraù-Gopikaramana-sarovara; tatra-there; tértha-sahasräëi-thousands of holy places; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and; påthak påthak-variously.

     In that place are Käma-sarovara, Gopikäramaëa-sarovara, many other lakes, and thousands of holy places.

Text 341

bahulävanasyädi-värähe 

païcamaà bähulavanaà
     vanänäà vanam uttamam
tatra gatvä naro devi
     agni-sthänaà sa gacchati

     bahulävanasya-of Bahulavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; païcamam-the fifth; bähulavanam-Bahulavana; vanänäm- vanam uttamam-the best of forests; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; agni-sthänam-Agniloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of Bahulävana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     The fifth forest is Bahulävana, the best of forests. O goddess, a person who goes there attains Agniloka

Text 342

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

bahulä çri-hareù patné
     tatra tiñöhati sarvadä
tasmin padmavane räjan
     bahu-puëya-phaläni ca

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; bahulä-Bahulä; çri-hareù-of Lord Kåñëa; patné'wife; tatra-there; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-always; tasmin-there; padmavane-ina forest of lotuses; räjan-O king; bahu-puëya-phaläni-many pious results; ca-and.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     Lord Hari's wife Bahula' stays there always. O king, in the forest of lotus flowers there one attains the result of many pious deeds.

Text 343

tatraiva ramate viñëur
     lakñmyä särdhaà sadaiva hi
tatra saìkarñaëaà kuëòam
     tatra mäna-saro nåpa

     tatra-there; eva-indeed; ramate-enjoys; viñëur-Viñëu; lakñmyä särdham-with Lakñmé; sadä-always; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; tatra-there; saìkarñaëam- kuëòam-Sankarsana-kuëòa; tatra-there; mäna-saraù-Mana-sarovara; nåpa-O king.

     There Lord Viñëu enjoys pastimes with Lakñmé eternally. In that place is Saìkarñaëa-kuëòa. In that place is Mäna-sarovara, O king.

Text 344

yas tatra kurute snänaà
     madhu-mäse nåpottamäsa paçyati harià tatra
     lakñmyä saha viçämpate

     yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; madhu-mäse-in the month opf Caitra; nåpottama-O king; sah-he» paçyati-sees; harim-Kåñëa; tatra-there; lakñmyä saha-with Lakñmé; viçämpate-O king.

     O king, a person who bathes there during the month of Caitra (March-April, sees Lord Viñëu and Lakñmé there.

Text 345

bhadravanasyädi-värähe

tasmin bhadravanaà näma
     ñañöhaà ca vanam uttamam
tatra gatvä tu vasudhe
     mad-bhakto mat-paräyaëaù
tad vanasya prabhävena
     nägalokaà sa gacchati

     bhadravanasya-of Bhadravana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tasmin-there; bhadravanam-Bhadravana; näma-named; ñañöham-sxith; ca-and; vanam-forest; uttamam-transcendental; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; mad-bhaktaù-My devotee; mat-paräyaëaù-devoted to Me; tad vanasya-of that forest; prabhävena-by the power; nägalokam-to Nagaloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of Bhadravana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Bhadravana is the sixth transcendental forest. O earth-goddess, a devotee attached to Me who goes there, goes to Nägaloka by the power of that forest.

Text 346

khadiravanasyädi-värähe 

saptamaà tu vanaà bhümau
     khädiraà loka-viçrutam
tatra gatvä naro bhadre
     mama lokaà sa gacchati

     khadiravanasya-of Kadiravana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; saptamam-seventh; tu-indeed; vanam- -forest; bhümau-on the earth; khädiram-Kadira; loka-viçrutam-famous in the world; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; bhadre-O auspicious one; mama-My; lokam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of Khadiravana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     The sixth forest is famous on the earth as Khadiravana. O auspicious one, a person who goes there will go to My abode.

Text 347

mahävanasyädi-värähe 

mahävanaà cäñöamaà tu
     sadaiva hi mama priyam
tasmin gatvä tu manuja
     indraloke mahéyate

     mahävanasya-of Mahavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mahävanam-Mahavana; ca-and; añöamam-eighth; tu-indeed; sadä-always; eva hi-indeed; mama-My; priyam-dear; tasmin-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; manujah-a person; indraloke-Indraloka; mahéyate-is glorified.

Glorification of Mahävana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:     

     The eighth forest is Mahävana, which is very dear to Me. A person who goes there is glorified on Indraloka.

Text 348

yamalärjuna-térthaà ca
     kuëòaà tatra ca vartate
paryastaà yatra çakaöaà
     bhinna-bhäëòa-kuöé-ghatam

     yamalärjuna-tértham-Yamalarjuna-tértha; ca-and; kuëòam-lake; tatra-there; ca-and; vartate-is; paryastam-overturned; yatra-where; çakaöam-the cart; bhinna-broken; bhäëòa-kuöé-ghatam-pots and pans.

     In that place are Yamalärjuna-tértha and Yamalärjuna-kuëòa. In that place is the place where the cart was overturned and the pots and pans were broken.

Text 349

tatra snänopaväsena
     anantaà phalam äpnuyäötatra gopéçvaro näma
     mahä-pätaka-näçanaù

     tatra-there; snäna-by bathing; upaväsena-and fasting; anantam-limitless; phalam-result; äpnuyät-attains; tatra-there; gopéçvaraù-Gopisvara; näma-named; mahä-pätaka-näçanaù-destroying great sins.

     By fasting and bathing in that place one attains a limitless result. The Deity Gopéçvara there destroys great sins.

Text 350

sapta-sämudrikaà näma
     kuëòaà tu vimalodakam
devasyägre tu vasudhe
     gopéçasya mahätmanaù

     sapta-sämudrikam- näma kuëòam-Sapta-samudrika-kuëòa; tu-indeed; vimalodakam-with clear water; devasya-the Deity; agre-before; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; gopéçasya mahätmanaù-of Lord Gopéçvara.

     O earth-goddess, before the Deity of Lord Gopéçvara is a clear-water lake named Saptasämudrika-kuëòa. 

Text 351

pitaraç cäbhinandanti
     päniyaà piëòaà eva ca
soma-väre tö amävasyäà
     piëòa-dänaà karoti yaù
gayä-piëòaà pradänaà ca
     kåtaà nästy atra saàçayaù

     pitaraù-the pitäs; ca-and; abhinandanti-rejoice; päniyam-water; piëòam-piëòa; eva-indeed; ca-and; soma-vare-on Monday; tö amävasyäm-on the new-moon day; piëòa-of piëòa; dänam-offering; karoti-does; yaù-who; gayä-piëòam-piëòa at Gayä; pradänam-offering; ca-and; kåtam-done; na-not; asti-is; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.

     The pitäs enjoy water and piëòa there. A person who on a Monday new-moon day offers piëòa there, offers piëòa at Gayä. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 352

lohajaìghavanasyädi-värähe 

lohajaìghavanaà näma
     lohajaìghena rakñitamnavamaà tu vanaà devi
     sarva-pätaka-näçanam

     lohajaìghavanasya-of Lohajaìghavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; lohajaìghavanam- näma-named Lohajaìghavana; lohajaìghena-by Lohajaìgha; rakñitam-protected; navamam-ninth; tu-indeed; vanam-forest; devi-O goddess; sarva-of all; pätaka-sins; näçanam-destruction.

Glorification of Lohajaìghavana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:    

     O goddess, Lohajaìghavana, which was protected by Lohajaìghäsura, and which destroys all sins, is the ninth forest.

Text 353

bilvavanasya 

vanaà bilvavanaà näma
     daçamaà deva-püjitam
tatra gatvä tu manujo
     brahmaloke mahéyate

     bilvavanasya-of Blivavana; vanam- bilvavanam- näma-the forest named Blivavana; daçamam-tenth; deva-by the demigodsl; püjitam-worshiped; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; manujaù-a person; brahmaloke-in Brahmaloka; mahéyate-glorified.

Glorification of Bilvavana

     The forest named Bilvavana, which is worshiped by the demigods, is the tenth forest. A person who goes there is glorified on Brahmaloka.

Text 354

bhäëòéravanasya 

ekädaçaà tu bhäëòéraà
     yoginäà priyam uttamam
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     naro garbhaà na gacchati

     bhäëòéravanasya-of Bhäëòéravana; ekädaçam- tu-indeed; bhäëòéram-Bhäëòéra; yoginäm-of the yogis; priyam-dear; uttamam-most; tasya-of that» darçana-by seeing; mätreëa-only; naraù-a person; garbham-a mother's womb;û na-not; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of Bhäëòéravanä
     The eleventh forest is Bhäëòéravana, which is very dear to the yogés. Simply by seeing it, a person will never again enter a mother's womb.

Text 355

bhäëòéraà samanupräpya
     vanänäà vanam uttamam
väsudevaà tato dåñövä
     punar-janma na vidyate

     bhäëòéram-Bhäëòéra; samanupräpya-attaining; vanänäm-of forests; vanam-forest; uttamam-best; väsudevam-Lord Väsudeva; tataù-then; dåñövä-having seen; punar-again; janma-birth; na-not; vidyate-is.

     A person who visits Bhäëòéravana, the best of forests, and sees the Deity of Lord Väsudeva there, never takes birth again.     

Text 356

tasmin bhäëòérake snätvä
     samyato niyatäçanaù
sarva-päpa-vinirmukta
     indralokaà sa gacchati

     tasmin-there; bhäëòérake-in Bhäëòéravana; snätvä-having bathed; samyataù-controlling the senses; niyatäçanaù'fasting; sarva-päpa-all sins;vinirmuktah-free; indralokam-Indra's abode; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

     A person who, fasting and controlling his senses, bathes in Bhäëòéravana, becomes free of all sins and goes to Indraloka.

Text 357

çri-våndävanasyädi-värähe 
våndävanaà dvädaçamaà
     våndayä parirakñitam
mama caiva priyaà bhüme
     sarva-pätaka-näçanam

     çri-våndävanasya-of Våndävana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; våndävanam-Våndävana; dvädaçamam-twelfth; våndayä-by Vånda'-devé; parirakñitam'protected; mama-My; ca-and; eva-indeed; priyam-favorite; bhüme-on the earth; sarva-all; pätaka-sins; näçanam-destroying.

Glorification of Çré Våndävana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:
     The twelfth forest is Våndävana, which is protected by Våndä-devi, and which destroys all sins, O earth-goddess, it is My favorite.

Text 358

taträhaà kréòayiñyämi
     gopé-gopälakaiù saha
su-ramyaà su-pratétaà ca
     deva-dänava-durlabham

     tatra-there; aham-I; kréòayiñyämi-will enjoy pastimes; gopé-with the gopés; gopälakaiù-and gopas; saha-with; su-ramyam-very charming; su-pratétam-very famous; ca-and; deva-for the devas; dänava-and danavas; durlabham-difficult to attain.

     It is very beautiful and very famous. The devas and dänavas can attain it only with great difficulty. There I will enjoy pastimes with the gopas and gopés.     

Text 359

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

tato våndävanaà puëyaà
     våndä-devi-samäçritam
hariëädhiñöhitaà tä ca
     rudra-brahmädi-sevitam

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tataù-then; våndävanam-Våndävana; puëyam-sacred; våndä-devé-by Våndä-devé; samäçritam-sheltered; hariëä-by Lord Hari; adhiñöhitam-resided; tat-that; ca-and; rudra-brahma-ädi-by the demigods headed by Brahma' and Çiva; sevitam-served.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     Next is sacred Våndävana, where Lord Hari resides. It is protected by Våndä-devi and served by Brahma, Çiva, and the demigods.

Text 360

våndävanaà su-gahanaà
     viçälaà viståtaà bahu
munénäm açramaiù pürëaà
     vanya-våndä-samänvitam

     våndävanam-Våndävana; su-gahanam-very dense; viçälam-large; viståtam-expanded; bahu-great; munénäm'of sages; açramaiù-with açramas; pürëam-filled; vanya-våndä-with creatures and flowers of the forest; samänvitam-filled.

     Våndävana is very large and dense. It is filled with sages' äçramas. It is filled with the creatures and flowers of the forest. 

Text 361

yathä lakñméù priyatamä
     yathä bhakti-parä naräù
govindasya priyatamaà
     tathä våndävanaà bhuvi

     yathä-as; lakñméù-the goddess of fortune; priyatamä-most dear; yathä-as; bhakti-parä naräù-the devotees; govindasya-of Govinda; priyatamam-most dear; tathä-in that way; våndävanam-Våndävana; bhuvi-on the earth.

     As Lakñmé-devé is dear, and as the devotees are dear, so in this world is Våndävana dear to Lord Govinda.

Text 362

vatsair vatsa-tarébhiç ca
     säkaà kréòati mädhavaù
våndävanäntara-gataù
     sa-ramair bälakävåtaù

     vatsair-with calves; vatsa-tarébhiù-cows; ca-and; säkam-with; kréòati-plays; mädhavaù-Kåñëa; våndävanäntara-gataù-in Våndävana; sa-ramair-with Balaräma; bälaka-by the boys; ävåtaù-accompanied.

     In Våndävana Lord Mädhava enjoys pastimes with the cows, calves, boys, and Balaräma.

Text 363

aho våndävanaà ramyaà
     yatra govardhano giriù
yatra térthäny anekäni
     viñëudeva-kåtäni ca

     ahaù-Oh; våndävanam-Våndävana; ramyam-charming; yatra-where; govardhano giriù-Govardhana Hill; yatra-where; térthäni-sacred places; anekäni-many; viñëudeva-kåtäni-made by Lord Viñëu; ca-and.

     Oh, Våndävana is beautiful with Govardhana Hill and with many holy places made sacred by Lord Viñëu.

Text 364

pädme nirväëa-khaëòe 

paramänanda-kandäkhyaà
     mahä-pätaka-näçanam
samasta-duùkha-samhantå-
     jéva-mätra-vimuktidam

     pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; nirväëa-khaëòe-Nirväëa-khaëòa; paramänanda-kanda-äkhyam-known as the source of transcendental bliss; mahä-pätaka-näçanam-destroying great sins; samasta-duùkha-samhantå-destroying all sufferings; jéva-mätra-vimuktidam-giving liberation to the living entities.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Nirväëa-khaëòa, it is said:

     Våndävana is filled with transcendental bliss. It destroys the greatest sins. It ends all sufferings. Simply living within it grants liberation.

Text 365

çré-daçama-skande

vanaà våndävanaà näma
     paçavyaà nava-känanam
gopa-gopé-gaväà sevyaà
     puëyädri-tåëa-vérudham

     çré-daçama-skande-in the Tenth Canto of Çrémad-Bhägavatam; vanaà-another forest; våndävanaà näma-named Våndävana; paçavyaà-a very suitable place for maintenance of the cows ad other animals; nava-känanam-there are many new gardenlike places; gopa-gopé-gaväà-for all the cowherd men, the members of their families, and the cows; sevyaà-a very happy, very suitable place; puëya-adri-there are nice mountains; tåëa-plants; vérudham-and creepers.

     In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.11.28, it is said:

     Between Nandéçvara and Mahavana is a place named Våndävana. This place is very suitable because it is lush with grass, plants and creepers for the cows and other animals. It has nice gardens and tall mountains and is full of facilities for the happiness of all the gopas and gopés and our animals.*

Text 366

våndävanaà sakhi bhuvo vitanoti kértià
     yad devaké-suta-padämbuja-labdha-lakñméù
govinda-veëum anu-matta-mayüra-nåtyaà
     prekñyädri-sänv-avataräny asamasta-sattvam
     våndävanam-Våndävana; sakhi-O friend; bhuvaù-of the earth; vitanoti-expands; kértim-the fame; yad'which; devaké-suta-of Devaké's son;pada-ambuja-lotus feet; labdha-attained; lakñméù-opulence; govinda-of Kåñëa; veëum-the flute; anu-following; matta-maddened; mayüra-peacocks; nåtyam-dancing; prekñya-seeing; adri-of the hill; sänv-on the top; avataräny asamasta-sattvam-not possible for others.

     In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.21.10, it is also said:

     Dear friends, our Våndävana is proclaiming the glories of this entire earth because this planet is glorified by the lotus footprints of the son of Devaké. Besides that, when Govinda plays His flute, the peacocks immediately become mad. When all the animals and trees and plants, either on the top of Govardhana Hill or in the valley, see the dancing of the peacock, they all stand still and listen to the transcendental sound of the flute with great attention. We think that this boon is not possible or available on any other planet.*

Text 367

     etena våndävanasya loka-prasiddhyä ñodaça-kroçi-vistäratvaà yuktam eva. çri-govinda-våndävanäkhye båhad-gautaméya-tantre tö idaà dåçyate. tatra närada-praçno yathä

kim idaà dvädaçabhikhyaà
     våndäraëyaà viçämpate
çrotum icchämi bhagavan
     yadi yogyo 'sti me vada

     etena-by this; våndävanasya-of Våndävana; loka-in the world; prasiddhyä-by the fame; ñodaça-kroçi-vistäratvam-16 kroças in size; yuktam-proper; eva-indeed; çri-govinda-våndävana-äkhye-in the Govinda-Våndävana-çästra; båhad-gautaméya-tantre'in teh Båhad-gautaméya Tantra; tu-indeed; idam-this; dåçyate-is seen; tatra-there; närada-of Närada; praçnaù-the question; yathä-as; kim-what?; idam-this; dvädaçäbhikhyaàknown as the twelfth; våndäraëyam-Våndävana; viçämpate-O king; çrotum-to hear; icchämi-I wish; bhagavan-O Lord; yadi-if;û yogyaù-proper; asti-is; me-for me. vada

     Våndävana is famous in this world as being 16 kroças (32  size. This is seen in the Çré Govinda-Våndävana-çästra and the Båhad-Gautaméya-tantra. In that scripture Närada asks the following question:

     What is Våndävana, which is named here as the twelfth forest? I desire to hear of it. O Lord, if You think it is right, please tell me of it.

Text 368

tatra çri-kåñëasyottaram

idaà våndävanaà ramyaà
     mama dhämaiva kevalam
atra ye paçavaù pakñi-
     våkña-kéöa-narämaräù
ye ca santi mamädhiñöhe
     måtä yänti mamälayam

     tatra-there; çri-kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; uttaram-answer; idam-this; våndävanam-Våndävana; ramyam-beautiful; mama-My; dhäma-abode; eva-indeed; kevalam-transcendental; atra-here; ye-who; paçavaù-animals; pakñi-birds; våkña-trees; kéöa-insects and words; nara-humans; amaräù-demigods; ye-who; ca-and; santi-are; mama-My; adhiñöhe-stay; måtäù-after death; yänti-attain; mama-My; alayam-abode.

     Lord Kåñëa answered:

     Beautiful Våndävana is My transcendental abode. The beasts, birds, trees, insects, worms, humans, and demigods who stay here with Me will all go, when they die, to My own abode.

Text 369

atra ye gopa-kanyäç ca
     nivasanti mamälaye
yoginyas tä mayä nityaà
     mama seva-paräyaëäù

     atra-here; ye-who; gopa-kanyäù-gopés; ca-and; nivasanti-reside; mama-My; alaye-in the abode; yoginyaù-yoginés; täh-they; mayä-by Me; nityam-eternally; mama-My; seva-to the service; paräyaëäù-devoted.

     The gopés who reside here in My abode and serve Me with devotion stay eternally by My side. 

Text 370

païca-yojanam evästi
     vanaà me deha-rüpakam
kälindéyaà suñumëäkhyä
     paramämåta-vähiné
atra deväç ca bhütäni
     vartante sükñma-rüpataù
     païca-yojanam-five yojanas; eva-indeed; asti-is; vanam-forest; me-My; deha-rüpakam-form;û kälindéyam-in the Yamunä; suñumna-äkhyäh-named Suñumëä; parama-amåta-vähiné-a river of nectar; atra-here; deväù-demigods; ca-and; bhütäni-sages; vartante-are; sükñma-in subtle; rüpataù-forms.

     This forest of five yojanas (40 miles, is My body. This Yamunä is the Suñumnä River that flows with nectar. The demigods and sages stay here in subtle forms.

Text 371

sarva-deva-mayaç cähaà
     na tyajämi vanaà kvacit
ävirbhävas tirobhävo
     bhaved atra yuge yuge
tejomayam idaà ramyam
     adåçyaà carma-cakñusä

     sarva-deva-mayaù-the personification of all the demigods; ca-and; aham-I; na-not; tyajämi-leave; vanam-forest; kvacit-somewhere; ävirbhävaù-appearance;û tirobhävaù-disappearance; bhaved-is; atra-here; yuge yuge-milleneium after millenium; tejomayam-splendid; idam-this; ramyam-charming; adåçyam-invisible; carma-f flesh; cakñusä-eyes.

     I, who am the personification of all the demigods, never leave this forest. Millenium after millenium I appear and disappear. This splendidly beautiful forest then becomes invisible to material eyes.

Text 372

atha çri-govindasyädi-värähe 

våndävane ca govindaà
     ye paçyanti vasundhare
na te yama-purià yänti
     yänti puëya-kåtäà gatim

     atha-now; çri-govindasya-of Lord Govinda; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; våndävane-in Våndävana; ca-and; govindam-Lord Govinda; ye-who; paçyanti-see; vasundhare'O earth; na-not; te-they; yama-purim-Yama's city; yänti-attain; yänti'they go; puëya-kåtäm-of the pure; gatim-to the destination.

Glorification of the Çré Govinda Deity
     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O earth-goddess, they who see the Govinda Deity in Våndävana do not go to Yamaräja's city. They go to the place where pure-hearted saints go.

Text 373

skände mathurä-khaëòe çri-näradoktau 

tasmin våndävane puëyaà
     govindasya niketanam
tat-sevaka-samakérëaà
     tatraiva sthéyate mayä

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; çri-närada-uktau-in Närada's words; tasmin-in this; våndävane-Våndävana; puëyam-sacred; govindasya-of Govinda; niketanam-the temple; tat-sevaka-His servants; samakérëam-assembled; tatra-there; eva-indeed; sthéyate-is stood; mayä-by me.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, Çré Närada says:

     In Våndävana is the sacred temple of Lord Govinda. When His servants are assembled, I stand among them.

Text 374

bhuvi govinda-vaikuëöhaà
     tasmin våndävane nåpa
yatra våndädayo bhåtyäù
     santi govinda-manasaù

     bhuvi-on the earth; govinda-vaikuëöham-Lord Govinda's Vaikuëöha abode; tasmin-in that; våndävane-Våndävana;û nåpa-O king; yatra-where; våndä-ädayaù-beginning with Vånda'-devé; bhåtyäù-servants; santi-are; govinda-manasaù-their hearts fixed on Lord Govinda.

     O king, Våndävana, where Våndä-devi and others whose hearts are fixed on Lord Govinda stay, is Lord Govinda's Vaikuëöha abode on this earth. 

Text 375

våndävane mahä-sadma
     yair dåñöaà puruñottamaiù
govindasya mahé-päla
     te kåtärthä mahé-tale

     våndävane-in Våndävana; mahä-sadma-great abode; yair-by whom; dåñöam-seen; puruña-uttamaiù-by great souls; govindasya-of Lord Govinda; mahé-päla-O king; te-they; kåtärthäh-successful; mahé-tale-on the earth.

     O king, the great souls who see Lord Govinda's temple in Våndävana have attained all success on this earth.

Text 376

atha çri-govinda-térthasya saura-puräne 

govinda-svämi-térthäkhyam
     asti térthaà mahottamam
vasudeva-tanüjasya
     viñëor atyanta-vallabham

     atha-now; çri-govinda-térthasya-of Çré Govinda-tértha; saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; govinda-svämi-térthäkhyam-named Govindasvämi-tértha; asti-is; tértham-a holy place; mahä-uttamam-great; vasudeva-of Vasudeva; tanüjasya-of the son; viñëor-of Lord Viñëu;û atyanta-vallabham-very dear.

Glorification of Govinda-tértha

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     The great holy place named Govindasvämi-tértha is very dear to Lord Viñëu, who became the son of King Vasudeva.

Text 377

govinda-svämi-nämatra
     vasaty arcätmako 'cyutaù
tatra snätvä tam abhyarcya
     muktim icchanti sädhavaù

     govinda-svämi-näma-named Govinda-svämé; atra-here; vasati-resides; arcätmakaù-Deity; acyutaù-Acyuta; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; tam-Him; abhyarcya-having worshiped; muktim-liberation» icchanti-desire; sädhavaù-saints.

     Here Lord Acyuta's Deity of Lord Govindasvämé resides. The saintly devotees bathe nearby, worship the Deity, and yearn for release from the world of birth and death.

Text 378-379

atha çri-brahma-kuëòasyädi-värähe

tatra brähme mahä-bhäge
     bahu-gulma-latävåtetatra snänaà prakurvéta
     eka-rätroñito naraù

gandharvair apsarobhiç ca
     kréòamänaù sa modate
tathätra muïcate präëän
     mama lokaà sa gacchati

     atha-now; çri-brahma-kuëòasya-of Brahma-kuëòa; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; brähme-in Brahma-kuëòa; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; bahu-gulma-latäv-with many trees and vines; ävåte-filled; tatra-there; snänam-bath; prakurvéta-does; eka-rätra-for one night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; gandharvair-with Gandharvas; apsarobhiù-apsaräs; ca-and; kréòamänaù-playing; sah-he; modate-enjoys; tathä-so; atra-here; muïcate'is liberated; präëän-from life; mama-My; lokam-abode; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

Glorification of Brahma-kuëòa

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     A person who, fasting for the night, bathes in beautiful Brahma-kuëòa, which is surrounded by many trees and vines, enjoys pastimes with the Gandharvas and Apsaräs. Leaving this life here, he goes to My abode.

Text 380

skände 

tatra kuëòaà mahä-bhäge
     bahu-gulma-latävåtam
puëyam eva mahä-térthaà
     su-ramya-salilävåtam

     skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; bahu-gulma-latä-ävåtam-surrounded with trees and vines; puëyam-sacred; eva-indeed; mahä-tértham-great holy place; su-ramya-charming; salila-with water; ävåtam-filled.

     In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:

     O auspicious one, in this place is a very sacred lake with beautiful waters surrounded by many trees and vines.

Text 381

tatra snänaà prakurvéta
     catuù-käloñito naraù
modate vimale divye
     gandharvänäà kule sukham

     tatra-there; snänam-a bath; prakurvéta-does; catuù-käla-four times; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; modate-enjoys; vimale-in the pure; divye-splendid world; gandharvänäm-of Gandharvas; kule'in the community; sukham-happiness.

     A person who fasts and bathes here four times, enjoys in the community of Gandharvas in the splendid heavenly world.

Text 382

taträpi muïcate präëän
     satataà kåta-niçcayaù
gandharva-kulam utsåjya
     mama lokaà sa gacchati

     tatra-there; api-also; muïcate-gives up; präëän-life; satatam-always; kåta-niçcayaù-determined; gandharva-kulam-in the community of Gandharvas; utsåjya-giving up; mama-My; lokam-abode; saù-he; gacchati-goes.

     A person who stays here with determination and departs from this life here, leaves the company of the Gandharvas and goes to My abode.

Text 383

taträçcaryaà pravakñyämi
     tat çåëusva vasundhare
labhante manujäù siddhià
     mama käryä-paräyaëäù

     tatra-there; äçcaryam-a wonder; pravakñyämi-I will tell; tat-this; çåëusva-please listen; vasundhare'O earth; labhante-attain; manujäù-people; siddhim-perfection; mama-My; käryä-paräyaëäù-devoted to the service.

     O earth-goddess, listen and I will tell you something wonderful: They who devotedly serve Me in this place attain the supreme perfection.

Text 384-385

tasya tatrottara-pärçve
     'çoka-våkñaù sita-prabhaù
vaiçäkhasya tu mäsasya
     çukla-pakñasya dvädaçé
sa puñpati ca madhyähne
     mama bhaktasukhävahaù
na kaçcid abhijänäti
     vinä bhägavataà çucim

     tasya-of this; tatra-there uttara-pärçve-north; açoka-våkñaù'an açoka tree; sita-prabhaù-white; vaiçäkhasya-of Vaisakha; tu-indeed; mäsasya-of the month; çukla-pakñasya dvädaçé-on the çukla-dvädaçé; sah-it; puñpati-blooms; ca-and; madhyähne-in mid-day; mama-My; bhakta-devottes; sukhävahaù-bringing happiness; na-not; kaçcid-anyone; abhijänäti-knows; vinä-except; bhägavatam-devotee; çucim-pure.

     North of this place is a white asoka tree that in the month of Vaiçäkha (April-May,, on the çukla-dvädaçé, at noon, suddenly bursts into full bloom. Except for My pure devotee, no one can understand how this happens.

Text 386

atha keçi-térthasyädi-värähe

gaìgä çata-guëaà puëyaà
     yatra keçé nipatitaù
taträpi ca viçeño 'sti
     keçi-térthe vasundhare
tasmin piëòa-pradänena
     gayä-piëòa-phalaà labhet

     atha-now; keçi-térthasya-of Keçi-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëam-a hundred times; puëyam-sacred; yatra-where; keçé-Keçé; nipatitaù-died; tatra-there; api-also; ca-and; viçeñaù-specific; asti-is; keçi-térthe-in Keçi-tértha; vasundhare-O earth; tasmin-there; piëòa-pradänena'by offering piëòa; gayä-piëòa-phalam-result of offering piëòa in Gayä; labhet-attains.

Glorification of Keçi-tértha

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Keçi-tértha, the place where Keçé died, is a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. By offering piëòa in Keçi-tértha one attains the result of offering piëòa in Gayä.

Text 387

atha käliya-hradasya tatraiva 

käliyasya hradaà gatvä     kréòäà kåtvä vasundhare
snäna-mätreëa tatraiva
     sarva-päpaiù pramucyate

     atha-now; käliya-hradasya-of Käliya-hrada; tatra-there; eva-indeed; käliyasya hradam-Käliya-hrada» gatvä-having gone; kréòäm-pastimes; kåtvä-having done; vasundhare-O earth; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; tatra-there; eva-indeed; sarva-päpaiù-of all sins; pramucyate-becomes freed.

Glorification of Käliya-hrada

     In the same scripture it is said:

     O earth-goddess, a person who goes to Käliya-hrada, bathes there and plays in the water, simply by bathing becomes freed from all sins.

Text 388

värähe 

käliyasya hradaà puëyam
     asti guhyaà paraà mama
yaträhaà kréòaye nityaà
     vimale yamunämbhasi

     värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; käliyasya hradam-Käliya-hrada; puëyam-sacred; asti-is; guhyam-secret; param-great; mama-My; yatra-where; aham-I; kréòaye-enjoy pastimes; nityam-eternally; vimale-in the pure; yamunä-of the Yamunä; ambhasi-water.

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Sacred Käliya-hrada, where I eternally play in the Yamuna's pure waters, is a great secret of Mine.

Text 389

taträbhiñekaà kurvéta
     aho-rätroñito naraù
 takñakasya gåhaà gatvä
     mama loke mahéyate    

     tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; takñakasya-of a carpenter; gåham-to the home;û gatvä-having gone; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.    

     Even a person born in a carpenter's house, who fasts for a day and night and bathes there, is glorified in My abode.

Text 390-391

aträpi mahad äçcaryaà
     paçyanti paëòitä naräù
käliya-hrada-pürveëa
     kadambo mahato drumaù

çata-çäkho viçäläkñi
     puñpaà surabhi-gandhi ca
sa ca dvädaça-mäsäni
     manojïaù çubha-çétalaù
puñpäyati viçäläkñi
     bhäsvaraàs tu diço daça

     atra-here; api-also; mahad-great; äçcaryam-wonder; paçyanti-see; paëòitäù naräù-wise; käliya-hrada-of Käliya-hrada;pürveëa-in the east; kadambaù-kadamba tree; mahataù-great; drumaù-tree; çata-hundred; çäkhaù-branches; viçäla-large; äkñi-eyes; puñpam-flowers; surabhi-gandhi-fragrant; ca-and; sah-it; ca-and; dvädaça-mäsäni-for 12 months; manojïaù'beautiful; çubha-pleasant; çétalaù-cool; puñpäyati-blooms; viçäläkñi-O girl with the beautiful eyes; bhäsvaran-shining; tu-indeed; diçaù-directions; daça-ten.

     Wise men see a great wonder there. To the east of Käliya-hrada is a great kadamba tree. O girl with beautiful, large eyes, this beautiful, splendidly white, pleasnatly cool, hundred-branched tree is filled with fragrant flowers. O girl with beauitful, large eyes, this tree remains always in bloom through all twelve months of the year, always filling the ten directions with its splendor. 

Text 392

saura-puräne 

tataù käliya-térthäkhyaà
     térthaà aàho-vinäçanam
anåtyad yatra bhagavän
     bälaù käliya-mastake

     saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; käliya-tértha-äkhyam-named Käliya-tértha; tértham-holy place» aàhaù-sins; vinäçanam-destroying; anåtyad-danced; yatra-where; bhagavän-the Lord; bälaù'a child; käliya-of Käliya; mastake-on the head.

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:
     Next is the holy place named Käliya-tértha, which destroys sins. There the Supreme Personality of Godhead as boy danced on Käliya's head.

Text 393

tatra yas tu kåta-snäno
     väsudevaà samarcayet
agaëya-janma-duñpräpaà
     kåñëa-säyujyam açnute

     tatra-there; yaù-who; tu-indeed; kåta-snänaù-bathes; väsudevam-Lord Väsudeva; samarcayet-worships; agaëya-countless; janma-births; duñpräpam-difficult to attain; kåñëa-säyujyam-Kåñëa-sayuja mukti; açnute-enjoys.

     A person who bathes there and worships Lord Väsudeva attains kåñëa-säyujya-mukti, which is difficult to attain even after countless births.

Text 394

atha dvädaçaditya-saàjïasyädi-värähe 

sürya-térthe naraù snäto
     dåñövädityaà vasundhare
äditya-bhavanaà präpya
     kåta-kåtyaù sa modate

     atha-now; dvädaçaditya-saàjïasya-Dvädaçäditya-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; sürya-térthe-at Sürya-tértha; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; dåñövä-having seen; ädityam-the sun-god» vasundhare-O earth; äditya-bhavanam-the sun-god's abode; präpya-attaining; kåta-kåtyaù'successful; sah-he; modate-enjoys.

Glorification of Dvädaçäditya-tértha

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O earth-goddess, a person who bathes at Sürya-tértha and sees the deity of the sun-god there, goes to the sun-god's abode and becomes happy.

Text 395

äditye 'hani saìkräntäv
     asmin térthe vasundhare
manasäbhépsitaà kämaà
     sampräpnoti na saàçayaù

     äditye ahani-on Sunday; saìkräntäv-on Sankranti; asmin-in this; térthe-holy place; vasundhare-O earth; manasä-by the heart; abhépsitam-desired; kämam-desire;û sampräpnoti-atains; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

     O earth-goddess, a person (who bathes, at this holy place on a Sunday during a sankranti attains his heart's desire. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 396

saura-puräne 

dvädaçäditya-térthäkhyaà
     térthaà tad anu pävakam
tasya darçana-mätreëa
     nåëäm aàho vinaçyati

     saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; dvädaçäditya-térthäkhyam-named Dvädaçäditya-tértha; tértham-holy place; tad-that; anu-following; pävakam-purifying; tasya-of it; darçana-mätreëa-simply by seeing; nåëäm-of men; aàhaù-sin; vinaçyati-perishes.

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     Next is purifying Dvädaçäditya-tértha. Simply by seeing it, the sins of men become destroyed.

Text 397

athokta-kramaà yäträyäù kartavyopadeçaù. ädi-värähe 

prathamaà madhuvanaà proktaà
     dvädaçaà våndikävanam
etäni ye prapaçyanti
     na te naraka-bhojinaù

     atha-then; ukta-said; kramam-sequence; yäträyäù-of a visit; kartavya-to do; upadeçaù-teaching; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; prathamam-first; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; proktam-said; dvädaçam-twelve; våndikävanam-Våndävana;û etäni-they; ye-who; prapaçyanti-see; na te-they; naraka-hell; bhojinaù-experience.

Instruction to Visit the Twelve Forests of Våndävana

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     They who see the twelve forests of Våndävana, which begin with Madhuvana, will not go to hell.

Text 398

yathä-krameëa ye yäträà
     vanänäà dvädaçasya tu
kariñyanti varärohe
     yänti te brähmam älayam

     yathä-krameëa-one by one; ye-who; yäträm-visit; vanänäm-of the forests; dvädaçasya-twelve; tu-indeed; kariñyanti-will do; varärohe-O beautiful girl; yänti-attain; te-they; brähmam-spiritual; älayam-abode.

     O beautiful one, they who visit, one by one, the twelve forests (of Våndävana, go to the spiritual abode.

Text 399

atha çré-govardhanasya 

tatraiva asti govardhanaà näma
     kñetraà parama-durlabham
mathurä-paçcime bhäge
     adürad yojana-dvayam

     atha-now; çré-govardhanasya-of Govarhana Hill; tatra-there; eva-indeed; asti-is; govardhanam-Govardhana; näma-named; kñetram-place; parama-durlabham-very rare; mathurä-paçcime-west of Mathurä; bhäge-O auspicious one; adürad'not far; yojana-dvayam-two yojanas.

Glorification of Çré Govardhana 

     In the same scripture it is said:

     Two yojanas (16 miles), which is not very far, west of Mathura' is the very rare place named Govardhana Hill.

Text 400

anna-küöaà tataù präpya
     tasya kuryät pradakñiëam
na tasya punar ävåttir
     devi sarvaà bravémi te

     anna-küöam-Annaküö-tértha; tataù-then; präpya-attaining; tasya-of that; kuryät-may do; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; na-not; tasya-of him; punar-again; ävåttir-return; devi-O goddess; sarvam-everything; bravémi-I say; te-to you.

     A person who circumambulates the place named Annaküöa-tértha does not return to this world. O goddess, I will now tell you everything about it.

Text 401

snätvä mänasa-gaìgäyäà
     dåñövä govardhane harim
annaküöaà parikramya
     kià manaù paritapyase

     snätvä-having bathed; mänasa-gaìgäyäm-in the manasa-gangä; dåñövä-having seen; govardhane-on Govardhana Hill; harim-Lord Hari; annaküöam-Annaküöa-tértha; parikramya-circumambulating; kim-what?; manaù-heart; paritapyase-suffers.

     After bathing in the Manasa-gaìgä, seeing the Deity of Lord Hari on Govardhana Hill, and circumambulating Annaküöa-tértha, what heart can remain unhappy?

Text 402

indrasya varñato 'ty-arthaà
     gaväà péòä-karaà jalam
täsäà samrakñaëärthäya
     dhåto giri-varo mayä

     indrasya-of Indra; varñataù-rains; aty-artham-great; gaväm-of the cows; péòä-karam-tormenting» jalam-water; täsäm-of them; samrakñaëärthäya-to protect; dhåtaù-held; giri-varaù-the âest of hills; mayä-by Me.

     To protect the cows distressed by Indra's torrential rains, I lifted Govardhana Hill.

Text 403

anna-küöa iti khyätaù
     sarvataù çakra-püjitaù
soma-väre tö amävasyäà
     präpya govardhanaà naraù
dattvä piëòän pitåbhyaç ca
     räjasüya-phalaà labhet

     anna-küöa iti khyätaùknown as Annaküöa-tértha; sarvataù-completely; çakra-by Indra; püjitaù-worshiped; soma-väre-on Sunday; tu-indeed; amävasyäm-the new-moon; präpya-attaining; govardhanam-Go9vardhana; naraù-a person; dattvä-giving; piëòän-piëòa; pitåbhyaù-to the pitäs; ca-and; räjasüya-phalam-result of a räjasüya-yajna; labhet-attains.

     The place where Indra worshiped Lord Kåñëa is famous as Annaküöa-tértha. A person who, on a Sunday that is also a new-moon day, goes to Govardhana Hill and offers piëòa to his ancestors, attains the result of offering a räjasüya-yajïa.     

Text 404

skände mathurä-khaëòe 

govardhanaç ca bhagavän
     yatra govardhano dhåtaù
rakñitä yädaväù sarva
     indra-våñöi-niväraëät

     skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; govardhanaù-Govardhana; ca-and; bhagavän'the Lord; yatra-where; govardhanaù-Govardhana; dhåtaù-held; rakñitä-protected; yädaväù-the Yadus; sarve-all; indra-of Indra; våñöi-the rain; niväraëät-because of stopping.

     In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:

     Govardhana Hill is an incarnation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. When the Lord lifted the hill, all the people of Vraja were saved from Indra's rains.

Text 405

aho govardhano viñëur
     yatra tiñöhati sarvadä
yatra brahmä çivo lakñmér
     vasaty eva na saàçayaù

     ahaù-Oh; govardhanaù-Govardhana; viñëur-Lord Viñëu; yatra-where; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-always; yatra-where; brahmä-Brahmä; çivaù-Çiva; lakñmér-Lakñmé; vasati-reside; eva-certainly; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

     Oh, Lord Viñëu stays eternally on Govardhana Hill. Brahmä, Çiva, and Lakñmé also reside there. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 406

värähe 

asti govardhanaà näma
     guhyaà kñetraà paraà mama
adüräd añöa-kroçat tu
     mathuräyäç ca paçcime
     värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; asti-is; govardhanam- näma-named Govardhana; guhyam-secret; kñetram-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; adüräd-not far; añöa-kroçat-8 kroças; tu-indeed; mathuräyäù-from Mathurä; ca-and; paçcime-west.

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Eight kroças (16 miles), not very far, west of Mathura', is My very confidential place named Govardhana.

Text 407

taträpi mahad äçcaryaà
     yat paçyanti su-cetasaù
tasmin samvartate bhümir
     sarva-bhägavata-priyam

     tatra-there; api-also; mahad-great; äçcaryam-a wonder; yat-which; paçyanti-see; su-cetasaù'wise; tasmin-there; samvartate-is; bhümir-place; sarva-bhägavata-priyam-dear to all the devotees.

     The wise see a great wonder there. In that place is something dear to all the devotees.

Text 408

catur-viàçati-dvädaçyaà
     tasmin çikhara-parvate
sthülän paçyanti dépän vai
     dyotayanto diço daça

     catur-viàçati-dvädaçyam-on Caturvimsati-dvädaçé; tasmin-there; çikhara-parvate-on the hill; sthülän-great; paçyanti-see; dépän-lamps; vai-indeed; dyotayantaù-shining; diçaù-directions; daça-ten.

     On Caturviàçati-dvädaçé the devotees see on Govardhana Hill many great lamps shining in the ten directions.

Text 409

yaç ca tän paçyate dépän
     mama karma-paräyaëaù
labhate paramäà siddhim
     evam etän na saàçayaù

     yaù-who; ca-and; tän-them; paçyate-sees; dépän-lamps; mama-My; karma-paräyaëaù'devoted to the service; labhate-attains; paramäm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; evam-in this way;û etän-them; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

     They who, devoted to My service, see these lamps. attain the supreme perfection. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 410 

bhädre pärçva-parivartinyäm ekädaçyäà govardhana-yäträ. ädi-värähe

mäsi bhädra-pade yä tu
     çuklä caikädaçé çubhä
govardhane sopaväsaù
     kuryät tasya pradakñiëam

govardhanaà parikraman
     dåñövä devaà harià prabhum
räjasüyaçvamedhäbhyäà
     phalam präpnoty asaàçayaù

     bhädre-in Bhadra; pärçva-parivartinyäm ekädaçyäm-on the çukla-ekädaçé; govardhana-to Govardhana; yäträ-a visit; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mäsi bhädra-pade-in the month of Bhadra; yä-which; tu-indeed; çuklä-çukla; ca-and; ekädaçé-ekädaçé; çubhä-auspicious; govardhane-on Govardhana Hill; sopaväsaù-with fasting; kuryät-does; tasya-of it; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; govardhanam-Govardhana; parikraman-circumambulating; dåñövä-having seen; devam- harim- prabhum-Lord Hari; räjasüya-rajasuya; açvamedhäbhyäm-an asvamedha sacrifices; phalam-result; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayaù-without doubt.

Visiting Govardhana Hill During Ekädaçé in the Month of Bhädra (August-September)

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     On the auspicious çukla-ekädaçé in the month of Bhädra (August-September, one should fast and circumambulate Govardhana Hill. After circumambulating Govardhana Hill and seeing the Deity of Lord Hari there, one attains the result of having performed an räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 412

çré-daçame

hantäyam adrir abalä hari-däsa-varyo
     yad räma-kåçëa-caraëa-sparaça-pramodaù
mänaà tanoti saha-go-gaëayos tayor yat
     pänéya-süyavasa-kandara-kanda-mülaiù
     hanta-oh» ayam-this» adrir-hill» abaläù-O friends» hari-däsa-varyaù-the best among the servants of the Lord; yat-because; räma-kåçëa-caraëa-of the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa and Balaräma» sparaça-by the touch» pramodaù-jubilant» mänam-respects» tanoti-ogfers» saha-with» go-gaëayoù-cows, calves, and cowherd boys» tayoù-to Them (Sri Kåñëa and Balarama)» yat-because» pänéya-drinking water» süyavasa-very soft grass» kandara-caves» kanda-mülaiù-and by roots.

     In the Tenth Canto (10.21.18, of Srimad-Bhagavatam it is said:

     Of all the devotees this Govardhana Hill is the best! O my friends, this hill supplies Kåñëa and Balaräma, as well as Their calves, cows, and cowherd friends, with all kinds of necessities: water for drinking, very soft grass, caves, fruits, flowers, and vegetables. In this way the hill offers respect to the Lord. Being touched by the lotus feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma, Govardhana Hill appears very jubilant.*

Text 413

tatrastha-brahma-kuëòasya mathurä-khaëòe 

tatra snätvä brahma-kuëòe
     brahmaëä toñito hariù
indrädi-loka-pälänäà
     jätäni ca saräàsi hi

     tatra-there; stha-situated; brahma-kuëòasya-Brahma-kuëòa; mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa;û tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; brahma-kuëòe-in Brahma-kuëòa; brahmaëä-by Brahmä; toñitaù-pleased; hariù-Lord Hari; indra-ädi-loka-pälänäm-of Indra and the other demigod planetary rulers; jätäni'born; ca-and; saräàsi-lakes; hi-indeed.

Glorification of Brahma-kuëòa In That Place

     In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

     After bathing in Brahma-kuëòa, Brahmä satisfied Lord Hari. Indra and other planetary rulers created other lakes nearby.

Text 414

ädi-värähe 

hradaà tatra mahä-bhäge
     druma-gulma-latävåtam
catväri tatra térthäni
     puëyäni ca çubhäni ca

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; hradam-a lake; tatra-there; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; druma-gulma-latävåtam-surrounded by trees and vines; catväri-fourteen; tatra-there; térthäni puëyäni-holy places; ca-and; çubhäni-auspicious; ca-and.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O auspicious one, that lake is surrounded by groves of trees and vines and by fourteen auspicious holy places.

Text 415

aidraà pürvena pärçvena
     yama-térthaà tu dakñiëe
väruëaà pascime térthaà
     kauveraà cottareëa tu
tatra madhye sthitaç cähaà
     kréòayiñye yad icchayä

     aidram-Indra-tértha; pürvena-in the east; pärçvena-side; yama-tértham-Yama-tértha; tu-indeed; dakñiëe-in the south; väruëam-Varuëa-tértha; pascime-in the west; tértham- kauveram-Kuvera-tértha; ca-and; uttareëa-in the north; tu-indeed; tatra-there; madhye-in the middle; sthitaù-situated; ca-and; aham-I; kréòayiñye-will enjoy pastimes; yad-which; icchayä-as I wish.

     On the eastern side is Indra-tértha. On the south is Yama-tértha. On the west is Varuëa-tértha. On the north is Kuvera-tértha. In these places I will enjoy pastimes as I wish.

Text 416

çré-govinda-kuëòasya mathurä-khaëòe 

yaträbhiñikto bhagavän
     maghonä yadu-vairiëä
govinda-kuëòaà taj-jätaà
     snäna-mätreëa mokña-dam

     çré-govinda-kuëòasya-Govinda-kuëòa; mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathurä-khaëòa; yatra-where; abhiñiktaù-bathed; bhagavän-the Lord; maghonä-by Indra; yadu-of the Yadus; vairiëä-the enemy; govinda-kuëòam-Govinda-kuëòa; taê-jätam-born from that; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; mokña-dam-grants liberation.

Glorification of Çré Govinda-kuëòa
     In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

     The Supreme Personality of Godhead was bathed by Indra, who had become the enemy of Vraja. From that bathing Govinda-kuëòa, was created. Govinda-kuëòa grants liberation to those who do nothing more than bathe in it.

Text 417

ädi-värähe 

anna-küöasya sännidhye
     térthaà çakra-vinirmitam
tasmin snäne tarpaëe ca
     çata-kratu-phalaà labhet

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anna-küöasya-Annaküt„a; sännidhye-near; tértham-a holy place; çakra-by Indra; vinirmitam-made; tasmin-there; snäne-in âathing; tarpaëe-pleasing; ca-and; çata-kratu-phalam-result of a hundred yajnas; labhet-attains.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Near Annaküöa-tértha is the holy place (Govinda-kuëòa, that Indra made. A person who bathes there and offers tarpaëa attains the result of performing a hundred yajïas. 

Text 418

çré-rädhä-kuëòadikasyädi-värähe 

ariñöa-rädhä-kuëòäbhyäà
     snänät phalam aväpyate
räjasüyäçvamedhäbhyäà
     nätra käryä vicäraëä

     çré-rädhä-kuëòa-Rädha'-kuëòa; ädikasya-beginning with; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ariñöa-rädhä-kuëòäbhyäm-Rädha'-kuëòa and Çyäma-kuëòa; snänät-from bathing; phalam-result; aväpyate-is attained; räjasüya-açvamedhäbhyäm-of rajasuya and asvamedha yajnas; na-not; atra-here; käryä-should be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

Glorification of Rädhä-kuëòa and Other Places

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     By bathing in Rädhä-kuëòa and Syama-kuëòa, one attains the result of having performed a räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 419

mathurä-khaëòe 

dépotsave kärttike ca
     rädhä-kuëòe yudhiñöhira
dåçyate sakalaà viçvaà
     bhåtyair viñëu-paräyaëaiù

     mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa; dépotsave-in the dépotsava festival; kärttike-during Kärttika; ca-and; rädhä-kuëòe-at Rädha'-kuëòa; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; dåçyate-is seen; sakalam-all; viçvam-the universe; bhåtyair-by servants; viñëu-to Lord Viñëu; paräyaëaiù-devoted.

     In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:

     O Yudhiñöhira, during the dépotsava festival Lord Viñëu's devoted servants at Rädhä-kuëòa can see the entire universe.

Text 420

pädme kärttika-mähätmye 

govardhane girau ramye
     rädhä-kuëòaà priyaà hareù
kärttike bahuläñöamyäà
     tatra snätvä hareù priyaù

     pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya; govardhane-on Govardhana; girau-Hill; ramye'charming; rädhä-kuëòam-Rädhä-kuëòa; priyam-dear; hareù-to Hari; kärttike-in Kärttika; bahuläñöamyäm-Bahulastami; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; hareù'to Lord Hari; priyaù-dear.

     In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:

     Rädhä-kuëòa, by beautiful Govardhana Hill, is dear to Lord Hari. A person who bathes there on the Bahuläñöamé day of the month of Kärttika is also dear to Lord Hari.

Text 421

naro bhakto bhaved vipräs
     tat-sthitasya pratoñaëam
yathä rädhä priyä viñëos
     tasyäù kuëòaà priyaà tathä

     naraù-a person; bhaktaù-a devotee; bhaved-becomes; vipraùbrähmaëa; tat-sthitasya-staying there; pratoñaëam-satisfaction; yathä-as; rädhä-Rädhä; priyä-is dear; viñëoùto Viñëu; tasyäù-Her; kuëòam-lake; priyam-dear; tathä-in the same way.

     O brähmaëas, a person who satisfies the residents of Rädhä-kuëòa becomes a great devotee. As S"rématé Rädhä is dear to Lord Viñëu, so Her lake (Rädhä-kuëòa, is also dear to Him.

Text 422

sarva-gopéñu saivaikä
     viñëor atyanta-vallabhä
tat-kuëòe kärttikäñöamyäà
     tatra snätvä hareù priyaù

     sarva-among all; gopéñu-the gopés; sä-She; eva-indeed; ekä-alone; viñëor-to Lord Viñëu; atyanta-most; vallabhä-dear; tat-kuëòe-at Her lake; kärttika-of Kärttika; añöamyäm-on the astami day; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; hareù-of Lord Hari;û priyaù-dear.

     Among all the gopés, She is most dear to Lord Viñëu. A person who, on the añöamé day of the month of Kärttika, bathes in Her lake, becomes dear to Lord Hari.

Text 423

natvä stutvä ca sampüjyo
     deva-deva-janärdanaù
prabodhinyäà yathä-as; prétas
     tathä prétas tato bhavet

     natvä-offering obeisances; stutvä-offering prayers; ca-and; sampüjyaù-to be worshiped; deva-deva-the master of the demigods; janärdanaù-Janärdana; prabodhinyäm-on Prabodhiné; yathä-as; prétaùpleased; tathä-so; prétaù-pleased; tataù-then; bhavet-is.

     As Lord Janärdana, the master of the demigods, is pleased by obeisances, prayers and worship during the Prabodhiné day, so He is also pleased when these are done at Rädhä-kuëòa.

Text 424

athäkrüra-térthasya saura-puräëe 

ananta-vasati-çreñöhaà
     sarva-päpa-vinäçanam
akrüra-tértham aty-artham
     asti priyataraà hareù

     atha-now; akrüra-térthasya-of Akrüra-tértha; saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; ananta-limitless; vasati-of abodes; çreñöham-the best; sarva-päpa-vinäçanam-destroying all sins; akrüra-tértham-Akrüra-tértha; aty-artham asti priyataram-is very dear; hareù-to Lord Hari.

Glorification of Akrüra-tértha

     In the Saura Puräëa it is said:

     The best of the Lord's numberless abodes and the destroyer of all sins, Akrüra-tértha is very dear to Lord Hari.

Text 425

pürëimäyäà tu yaù snäyät
     tatra tértha-vare naraù
sa mukta eva saàsärät
     kärttikyäà tu viçeñataù

     pürëimäyäm-on the full-moon day; tu-indeed; yaù-who; snäyät-bathes; tatra-there; tértha-vare-at the best of holy places; naraù-a person; sah-he; muktah-liberated; eva-indeed; saàsärät-from birth and death; kärttikyäm-during Kärttika; tu-indeed; viçeñataù-specifically.

     A person who, on the full-moon day of the month of Kärttika, bathes at that very holy place, becomes freed from the cycle of repeated birth and death.

Text 426

ädi-värähe 

tértha-rajaà hi cäkrüraà
     guhyänäà guhyam uttamam
tat-phalaà samaväpnoti
     sarva-térthävagähanät

     ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tértha-rajam-the king of holy places; hi-indeed; ca-and; akrüram-Akrüra; guhyänäm-of secrets; guhyam-secret; uttamam-supreme; tat-phalam-result; samaväpnoti-atains; sarva-tértha-in all holy places; avagähanät-from bathing.

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Akrüra-tértha is the king of holy places, the most confidential of confidential abodes. There one attains the result of bathing in all other holy places.

Text 427

akrüre ca punaù snätvä
     rähu-graste diväkare
räjasüyaçvamedhäbhyäà
     phalaà präpnoti niçcitam

     akrüre-at Akrüra-tértha; ca-and; punaù-again; snätvä-having bathed; rähu-graste diväkare-on a solar eclipse; räjasüya-açvamedhäbhyäm-of a rajasuya and asvamedha sacrifice; phalam-result; präpnoti-attains; niçcitam-certainly.

     A person who, during a solar eclipse, bathes in Akrüra-tértha, certainly attains the result of performing a räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa.

Text 428

atha bhäëòägärasya värähe 

bhäëòägäram iti khyätaà
     guhyam ati tato mama    
labhante manujä bhümi
     siddhià tatra na saàçayaù

     atha-now; bhäëòägärasya-of Bhandagara-tértha; värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; bhäëòägäram-Bhandagara-tértha; iti-thus; khyätam-celebrated; guhyam-confidential; ati-very; tataù-then; mama-My; labhante-attain; manujäh-people; bhümi-on the earth; siddhim-perfection» tatra-there; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

Glorification of Bhäëòägära-tértha

     In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

     O earth-goddess, the place known as Bhäëòägära-tértha is My confidential abode. In Bhäëòägära-tértha people attain perfection. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 429-431

tatra kuëòaà mahä-bhäge
     druma-gulma-latävåtam
tatra snänaà prakurvéta
     aho-rätroñito naraù

lokaà vaidyädharaà gatvä
     modate kåta-niçcayaù
taträçcaryaà pravakñyämi
     bhümi guhyaà paraà mama

catur-viàçati-dvädaçyaà     mama bhakti-vayavsthitäù
ardha-rätreñu çåëvanti
     gétaà karëa-sukhävaham

     tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; druma-gulma-latävåtam-surrounded by trees and vines; tatra-there; snänam-bath; prakurvéta-does; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; lokam- vaidyädharam-Vidyadharaloka; gatvä-having gone; modate-enjoys; kåta-niçcayaù-determined; tatra-there; äçcaryam-a wonder; pravakñyämi-I will describe; bhümi-on the earth; guhyam-secret; param-great; mama-My; catur-viàçati-dvädaçyam-on caturvimsati-dvädaçé; mama-My; bhakti-vayavsthitäù-situated in devotion; ardha-half; rätreñu-in nights; çåëvanti-hear; gétam-sing; karëa-to the ears; sukha-happiness; avaham-carrying.

     O auspicious one, that lake is surrounded by groves of trees and vines. A person who, fasting for a day and a night, bathes there, goes to Vidyädharaloka, where enjoys great happiness. O earth-goddess, I shall now tell you a wonderful secret. At this place, on caturviàçati-dvädaçé, my devotees stay awake, in the middle of the night hearing songs about Me that bring pleasure to the ears.

Text 432

atha nandéçvarasya çré-daçame 

puëyä bata vraja-bhuvo yad ayaà nå-liìgo
     güòhaù puräëa-puruño vana-citra-mälyaù
gäù pälayan saha-balaù kvaëayaàç ca veëuà
     vikréòayäïcati giritra-ramärcitäìghriù

     atha-now; nandéçvarasya-of Nandéçvara; çré-daçame-in the Tenth Canto; puëyä-sacred; bata-indeed; vraja-bhuvaù-of the land of Vraja; yad-whéh; ayam-this; nr„-liìgaù-in a human form; güòhaù-concealed; puräëa-puruñaù-the ancient Supreme Person; vana-citra-mälyaù-wearing wonderful garlands of forest-flowers; gäù-the cows; pälayan-protecting; saha-balaù-with Balaräma; kvaëayan-playing; ca-and; veëum-the flute; vikréòayä-playfully; aïcati'tilting; giritra-by Çiva; ramä-and Lakñmé; arcita-worshiped; aìghriù-feet.

Glorification of Nandéçvara-tértha 

     In the Tenth Canto (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.44.13, it is said:
     Dear friends, just imagine how fortunate the land of Våndävana is where the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself is present, always decorated with flower garlands and engaged in tending cows along with His brother, Lord Balaräma. He is always accompanied by His cowherd boy friends, and He plays His transcendental flute. The residents of Våndävana are fortunate to be able to constantly see the lotus feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma, which are worshiped by great demigods like Lord Çiva and Brahmä and the goddess of fortune.*

Text 433

tathä ca paöhanti 

pävane sarasi snätvä
     kåñëaà nandéçvare girau
dåñövä nandaà yaçodäà ca
     sarväbhéñöam aväpnuyät

     tathä-so; ca-and; paöhanti-read; pävane sarasi-in Pävana-sarovara; snätvä-having bathed; kåñëam-Kåñëa; nandéçvare-in Nandéçvara; girau-hill; dåñövä-having seen; nandam-Nanda;
 yaçodäm-Yaçoda; ca-and; sarva-all; abhéñöam-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.

     In the Vedé literatures it is said:

     A person who bathes in Pävana-sarovara on Nandéçvara Hill and sees the Deities of Nanda and Yaçodä, attains all his desires.

Text 434

çakaöärohanasyädi-värähe 

çakaöärohanaà näma
     tasmin kñetre paraà mama
mathurä-paçcime bhäge
     adüräd ardha-yojane

     çakaöärohanasya-of Sakaöärohana-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; çakaöärohanam- näma-named Çakaöärohana-tértha; tasmin-in this; kñetre-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; mathurä-paçcime-to the west of Mathurä; bhäge-O auspicious one; adüräd-not far; ardha-yojane-half a yojana.

Glorification of Çakaöärohana-tértha

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     Half a yojana (4 miles), not far, west of Mathura' is My holy place named Çakaöärohana-tértha.

Text 435

anekäni sahasräëi
     bhramaräëäà vasanti vai
taträbhiñekaà kurvéta
     eka-rätroñito naraù
sa tu vaidyädharaà lokaà
     gatvä tu ramate sukham

     anekäni-many; sahasräëi-thousands; bhramaräëäm-of bees; vasanti-live; vai-indeed; tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; eka-rätra-for one night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; sah-he; tu-indeed» vaidyädharam- lokam-to Vidyadharaloka; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; ramate-enjoys; sukham-happiness.

     Many thousands of bees reside there. A person who, fasting for one night, bathes there, goes to Vidyädharaloka, where he enjoys great happiness.

Text 436

taträpi mahad äçcaryaà
     paçyanti pathi saàsthitäù
sarva-puñpa-varaà kuëòaà
     mägha-mäse tu dvädaçé

     tatra-there; api-also; mahad-a great; äçcaryam-wonder; paçyanti-see; pathi-on the pathway; saàsthitäù-situated; sarva-puñpa-varam-filled with all flowers; kuëòam-lake; mägha-mäse-in the month of Mägha; tu-indeed; dvädaçé-on the dvädaçé.

     Travelers on the pathways there see a great wonder. On the dvädaçé of the month of Mägha (January-February, they see the lake there filled with every kind of flower.

Text 437

atha grahaëa-snänädy-artham keñucit tértheñu kurukñetratväti-deçaù. ädi-värähe

govardhanaà tathäkrüraà
     dve koöé dakñiëottare
praskandanaà ca bhäëòéraà
     kurukñetra-samäni sat

     atha-now; grahaëa-snänädy-artham-for bathing; keñucit'certain; tértheñu-holy places; kurukñetratväti-deçaù-are like Kurukñetra; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; govardhanam-Govardhana; tathä-then; akrüram-Akrüra-tértha; dve-two; koöé'sides; dakñiëa-south; uttare-north; praskandanam-Praskandana-tértha; ca-and; bhäëòéram-Bhandira; kurukñetra-Kurukñetra; samäni-equal; sat-being.

Some of These Holy Bathing-places Are Like Kurukñetra

     In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

     With Govardhana and Akrüra-tértha on the south and north, and Praskandana-tértha and Bhäëòéra on the other sides, the area is like Kurukñetra.

Text 438

atha yathärtha-kathanaà tatraiva

asi-kuëòaà ca vaikuëöhaà
     koöi-térthottamaà tadä
avimuktaà soma-térthaà
     saàyamanaà tindukaà tathä

cakra-térthaà tathäkrüraà
     dvädaçäditya-saàjïakam
ete puëyäù paviträç ca
     mahä-pätaka-näçanäù

     atha-now; yathärtha-appropriate; kathanam-description; tatra-there; eva-indeed; asi-kuëòam-Asi-kuëòa; ca-and; vaikuëöham-Vaikuëöha-tértha; koöi-tértha-Koöi-tértha; uttamam-after; tadä-then; avimuktam-Avimukta-tértha; soma-tértham-Soma-tértha; saàyamanam-Samyamana-tértha; tindukam-Tinduka-tértha; tathä-then; cakra-tértham-Cakra-tértha; tathä-then; akrüram-Akrüra-tértha; dvädaçäditya-saàjïakam'the place named Dvädaçäditya-tértha; ete-these; puëyäù-sacred; paviträù-pure; ca-and; mahä-great; pätaka-sins; näçanäù-destroying.

These Places Are Like Kurukñetra

     In the same scripture it is said:

     The places are: Asi-kuëòa, Vaikuëöha-tértha, Koöi-tértha, Avimukta-tértha, Soma-tértha, Samyamana-tértha, Tinduka-tértha, Cakra-tértha, Akrüra-tértha, and Dvädaçäditya-tértha. These purifying sacred places destroy the greatest sins.

Text 439

kurukñeträ chata-guëä
     mathuräyäà na saàçayaù
     kurukñeträc-than Kurukñetra; chata-guëä-a hundred times» mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.

     These places in Mathura' are a hundred times more sacred than Kurukñetra. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 440

ye paöhanti mahä-bhäge
     çåëvanti ca samähitäù
mathuräyäç ca mähätmyaà
     te yänti paramäà gatim

     ye-who; paöhanti-who read; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; çåëvanti-hear; ca-and; samähitäù-assembled; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; ca-and; mähätmyam-glorification;- te-they; yänti-attain; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.

     O fortunate one, they who read or hear of the glories of Mathura' go to the supreme destination.

Text 441

te kuläni tärayanti
     dve çate pakñayor dvayoù
mähätmya-çravaëäd eva
     nätra käryä vicäraëä

     te-they; kuläni-relatives; tärayanti-liberate; dve çate-two hundred; pakñayor dvayoù'on both sides; mähätmya-of the glories; çravaëäd-by hearing; eva-indeed; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicäraëä-doubt.

     By hearing the glories of Mathurä, the listeners liberate two hundred relatives on both sides of their families. Of this there is no doubt.

Text 442 and 443

mathurä-mahä-térthäni

viçräntir asi-kuëòaà ca
     vaikuëöho dhruva eva ca
kåñëa-gaìgä cakra-térthaà
     sarasvatyäç ca saìgamaù

catuù-sämudrikaù küpo
     gokarëäkhya-çivas tathä
govardhano nanda-gåhaà
     vatsa-kréòanakas tathä
vanäni dvädaça tathä     mahä-térthäni mäthure

     mathurä-of Mathurä; mahä-the great; térthäni-holy places; viçräntir-Viçränti-tértha; asi-kuëòam-Asi-kuëòa; ca-and; vaikuëöhaù-Vaikuëöha-tértha; dhruva-Dhruva-tértha; eva-certainly; ca-and; kåñëa-gaìgä-the Kåñëa-gaìgä; cakra-tértham-Cakra-tértha; sarasvatyäù-the Sarasvaté; ca-and; saìgamaù-saìgama» catuù-sämudrikaù küpaù-Catuh-samudrika-kupa; gokarëäkhya-çivaù-Gokarëaküpa; tathä-then; govardhanaù-Govardhana; nanda-gåham-Nanda's home; vatsakréòanakaù-Vatsakridanaka; tathä-then; vanäni-forests; dvädaça-twelve; tathä'then; mahä-térthäni-great holy places; mäthure-in Mathurä.

The Great Holy Places of Mathurä

     Viçränti-tértha, Asi-kuëòa, Vaikuëöha-tértha, Dhruva-tértha, Kåñëa-gaìgä, Cakra-tértha, Sarasvaté-saìgama, Catuù-sämudrika-küpa, Gokarëa-çiva, Govardhana Hill, Nanda's home, Vatsa-kréòana-tértha, and the twelve forests, are the great holy places in Mathurä.

Text 444

atha mäthure deva-väräù

näräyaëänya-paryäyaù
     keçavo madhya-saàsthitaù
svayambhüù padmanäbhaç ca
     dérgha-viñëur gataçramaù
govindo hari-varähäv
     iti mathurä-devatäù 

     atha-now; mäthure-in Mathurä; deva-väräù-the great Deities; näräyaëänya-paryäyaù-beginning with Lord Nära'yaëa; keçavaù-Keçava; madhya-saàsthitaù-in the middle; svayambhüù-Svayambhü; padmanäbhaù-Padmanäbha; ca-and; dérgha-viñëur-Dérgha-Viñëu; gataçramaù-Lord Gataçrama; govindaù-Govinda; hari+hari; varähau-and Varäha; iti-thus; mathurä-in Mathurä; devatäù-the Deities. 

The Deities of Mathurä

     Näräyaëa, Keçava, Svayambhü, Padmanäbha, Dérgha-Viñëu, Gataçrama, Govinda, Hari, and Varäha, are the Deities of Mathurä.

Text 445

mathuräyäs tu mähätmyaà
     sa-vanäyä mahädbhutam
gopalottara-täpanyäm     anyad apy asti kértanam

     mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; tu-indeed; mähätmyam-glorification;- sa-vanäyäh-with its forests; mahä-adbhutam-great wonder; gopala-uttara-täpanyäm-in Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad, Chapter Two; anyad-another; api-also; asti-is; kértanam-glorification.

     This is the wonderful glorification of Mathura' and its forests. Further glorification is in the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad, Chapter Two.

Text 446

térthäny uktäni bhüréëi
     puräneñö atra mäthure
khyätäny evädhunä teñäà
     likhitänéha känicit

     térthäni-holy places; uktäni-described; bhüréëi-many; puräneñu-in the Puräëa; atra-here; mäthure'in Mathurä; khyätäni-famous; eva-indeed; adhunä-now; teñäm-of them; likhitäni-have been written; iha-here; känicit-some.

     Many holy places in Mathurä are described in the Puräëas. Some of the more famous of them have been written here.
 Çré Padyävalé